STEM School and Academy Barrons Building – Phase 3 · STEM School and Academy Barrons Building...

STEM School and Academy Barrons Building – Phase 3

Highlands Ranch, Colorado

Volume 1 Divisions 1 -12

SPECIFICATION MANUAL Construction Document Issue

2015.003 21 December 2015

STEM School and Academy Barrons Building Phase 3


PROJECT TEAM Page 1 of 1

PROJECT TEAM

OWNER: STEM School and Academy 8773 Ridgeline Boulevard

Highlands Ranch, Colorado 80129 Dr. Penelope Eucker, Executive Director

303.683.7836 [email protected]

ARCHITECT: 3890 Design, Inc. 3890 W. Arrowhead Road Littleton, Colorado 80123 Paul Kastner, Project Manager 303.929.0319 [email protected] STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: Moser-Renn Structural Service, Inc. 6000 E. Evans Ave., Bldg. 1, Suite 021 Denver, Colorado 80222 Natalie Moser-Renn, Project Manager 303.759.2200 nmozer‐[email protected] MECHANICAL ENGINEER: Envision Mechanical Engineers 9777 Pyramid Court, Suite 230 Englewood, Colorado 80112 Anthony Letts, Project Manager 303.688.0223 [email protected]

ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: Ackerman Engineering, Inc 16205 W. 64th Ave., Suite B3 Arvada, Colorado 80007 Don Ackerman, Project Engineer 303.278.7297 [email protected] PLUMBING ENGINEER: Envision Mechanical Engineers 9777 Pyramid Court, Suite 230 Englewood, Colorado 80112 Eric McTee, Project Manager 303.688.0223 [email protected] FOOD SERVICE: W. West Equipment & Furnishings Co. 9355 Northfield Boulevard Denver, Colorado 80238 Cory Sanders, Project Manager 720.961.0333 [email protected]

STEM School and Academy Barrons Building – Phase 3


TABLE OF CONTENTS – VOLUME 1 Page 1 of 2

TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 1

DIVISIONS 00 - 12 DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 2113 Instructions to Bidders 00 3100 Available Project Information 00 4314 Supplement A: Substitution Request Form DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 1000 Summary 01 2000 Price and Payment Procedures 01 2300 Alternates 01 3000 Administrative Requirements 01 4000 Quality Requirements 01 4100 Regulatory Requirements 01 4216 Definitions 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 5100 Temporary Utilities 01 6000 Product Requirements 01 7000 Execution and Closeout Requirements 01 7800 Close-Out Submittals 01 7900 Demonstration and Training DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 4100 Demolition DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 3000 Cast-In-Place Concrete DIVISION 04 - MASONRY Not Used DIVISION 05 - METALS 05 5000 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 1000 Rough Carpentry 06 4100 Architectural Millwork DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 5323 Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (EPDM) Membrane Roofing 07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 9005 Caulking and Sealing

TABLE OF CONTENTS – VOLUME 1 Page 2 of 2

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 08 1113 Steel Frames 08 1416 Flush Wood Doors 08 3100 Access Doors And Panels 08 3313 Coiling Counter Doors 08 4100 Aluminum Storefront 08 7100 Door Hardware 08 8000 Glazing DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 09 2116 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 3000 Tiling 09 5100 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 09 6500 Resilient Floor And Base Coverings 09 9650 Resilient Stair and Landing Covers 09 6800 Carpeting 09 7720 Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels 09 9000 Painting and Coatings DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10 1101 Visual Display Boards 10 1400 Signage 10 2113 Metal Toilet Compartments 10 2800 Toilet Accessories 10 4400 Fire Protection Specialties DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11 4000 Food Service Equipment 11 6623 Gymnasium Equipment DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12 4920 Roller Shades

STEM School and Academy Barrons Building – Phase 3 2015.003 Highlands Ranch, Colorado Construction Documents

00 2113 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

Page 1 of 4

SECTION 00 2113

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

SUMMARY

1.01 TABLE OF ARTICLES

A. Invitation

1. Bid Date

2. Project

3. Contract Time

B. Bid Documents and Contract Documents

1. Definitions

2. Contract Documents

3. Contract Documents Availability/Examination

4. Inquiries and Addenda

5. Substitutions

C. Site Assessment

1. Site Examination

D. Qualification of Bidders

1. Bidders

2. Subcontractors/Suppliers/Others

E. Bid Submission

1. Receipt and Opening of Bids/ Bid Depository

2. Preparation of Bids

3. Submittal of Bids

4. Bid Ineligibility

F. Bid Enclosures/Requirements

1. Bid Security

2. Sales and Use Tax

3. Bid Form Signature

G. Selection and Award/Offer Acceptance/Rejection

1. Method of Award

2. Execution of Contract

1.02 INVITATION

A. Bid Date

1. As indicated in Request for Proposal, Construction Manager at Risk for the STEM School and Academy Barons Building – Phase 3 Construction issued by Integrated Delivery Solutions.

00 2113 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 2 of 4

B. Project

1. The intent of this Bid request is to obtain an offer to perform work to complete tenant finish construction of the STEM School and Academy, Barrons Building – Phase 3 located at 8878 Barrons Boulevard, Highlands Ranch, Colorado 80129, for a Construction Manager At-Risk, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

2. Work of this proposed Contract comprises tenant finish, including general construction, structural, mechanical, electrical and Food Service work.

C. Contract Time


1.03 BID DOCUMENTS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Definitions

1. The following definitions add to the list of definitions included in the General Conditions of the Contract and shall be used in conjunction with them as a part of the Bidding Documents.

2. Bidding Documents include The Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents.

3. The Bidding Requirements consists of:

a. Advertisement For Bids.

b. Instructions to Bidders.

c. Form of Bid

d. Supplement:

2) Supplement A: Substitution Request Form (Bidding Phase).

4. Contract Documents: Defined in AIA A201 Article 1 including issued Addenda.

5. Bid, Offer, or Bidding: Act of submitting an offer.

6. Bid Amount: Monetary sum identified by the Bidder in the Bid Form.

B. Contract Documents

1. The Contract Documents are identified as Project Number 2015.003 STEM School and Academy, Barrons Building – Phase 3, as prepared by 3890 Design, Inc. who is located at 3890 W. Arrowhead Road Littleton, Colorado 80123, and with contents as identified in the Project Manual and Drawing Set.

C. Contract Documents Availability/Examination

1. Electronic Bid Documents may be obtained from 3890 Design, Inc.

2. Bid Documents are made available only for the purpose of obtaining offers for this project. Their use does not grant a license for other purposes.

6. Upon receipt of Bid Documents verify that documents are complete. Notify Architect should the documents be incomplete.

7. Immediately notify Architect upon finding discrepancies or omissions in the Bid Documents.

8. Bidders and Sub-bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids; neither the Owner nor Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.


D. Inquiries and Addenda

1. Direct questions to:

a. Paul Kastner, telephone 303-929-0319, [email protected]

2. Bidders must carefully examine and compare the Bidding Documents, examine the site and local conditions and at once report any ambiguity, inconsistency, or error discovered. Bidders and Sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall make written request to the Architect for interpretation or correction. Such requests must reach the Architect at least seven (7) days prior to the bid date.

3. The Architect will issue any and all interpretations, corrections, revisions, and amendments to all holders of Bidding Documents in the form of written addenda. Addenda will be transmitted at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to the time set for the receipt of Bids to all who are known by the issuing office to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents. Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose.

4. Each Bidder is responsible to ascertain prior to submitting a Bid that the Bidder has received all Addenda issued. All addenda issued shall become part of the Contract Documents and Bidders must acknowledge them in the Form of Bid.

5. Only those interpretations, corrections, revisions, and amendments confirmed by written addenda are binding. Bidders are cautioned to refrain from including in their Bid any interpretations, corrections, revisions, or amendments which are not confirmed by written addenda.

E. Substitutions

1. Where the Bid Documents stipulate a particular product, substitutions will be considered up to 10 days before receipt of bids.

2. Substitution requests shall be made utilizing Document 00 4325 Supplement A: Substitution Request Form (Bidding Phase). Each such request must include the name of the material, product or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution including drawings, cuts, performance and test data, and any other data or information necessary for a complete evaluation. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer.

3. If the Architect approves any proposed substitution, such approval is not official until set forth in an addendum. Do not include any substitutions not confirmed by written addenda.

4. In submission of substitutions to products specified, bidders shall include in their bid all changes required in the Work and changes to Contract Time and Contract Sum to accommodate such substitutions. A later claim by the bidder for an addition to the Contract Time or Contract Sum because of changes in work necessitated by use of substitutions shall not be considered.

5. The submission shall provide sufficient information to determine acceptability of such products.

6. Provide complete information on required revisions to other work to accommodate each proposed substitution.

7. Provide products as specified unless substitutions are submitted in this manner and accepted.

8. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements for additional requirements.

1.04 SITE ASSESSMENT

A. Site Examination


1. Examine the project site to become familiar with local conditions under which the work is to be performed, including availability and cost of labor and materials, and correlate personal observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.05 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS

A. Bidders

1. Bidders must be registered with the State of Colorado. The Bidders must include a Colorado registration number as provided for on the Form of Bid.

B. Subcontractors/Suppliers/Others

1. The Bidder is specifically advised that any person, firm, or other party to whom it is proposed to award a subcontract under this Contract must (1) be registered in the State of Colorado and have contractor's registration number, and (2) be acceptable to the Owner.

2. Refer to General Conditions for additional requirements.

1.06 BID SUBMISSION

A. Receipt and Opening of Bids


C. Submittal of Bids


END OF SECTION


00 3100 - AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION

Page 1 of 1

SECTION 00 3100

AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Certain information relating to existing building conditions is available to bidders but will not be part of the Contract Documents, as follows:

B. Previous building drawings:

1. Original copy is available for reference

a. Cahners Publishing Company. Original building Construction Documents prepared by SEM Architects, Inc.

b. STEM School and Academy – Barrons Building Phase 1 tenant finish Construction Documents prepared by 3890 Design, Inc.

c. STEM School and Academy – Barrons Building Phase 2 tenant finish Construction Documents prepared by 3890 Design, Inc.

d. These drawings, by its nature, cannot reveal all conditions that exist on the site. Should conditions be found to vary substantially from this documents, changes in the design and construction will be made, with resulting credits or expenditures to the Contract Sum accruing to Owner.

B. Site Survey:

1. Original copy is available for reference.

2. This survey identifies existing site conditions.

3. This survey, by its nature, cannot reveal all conditions that exist on the site. Should conditions be found to vary substantially from this survey, changes in the design and Construction Documents will be made, with resulting credits or expenditures to the Contract Sum accruing to Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION


00 4314 - SUPPLEMENT B: SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

Page 1 of 1

SECTION 00 4314

SUPPLEMENT A: SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

FORWARD ALL SUBSTITUTION REQUESTS TO:

Paul Kastner, Project Architect

3890 Design, Inc., 3890 W. Arrowhead Road Littleton, Colorado 80123

Phone: (303) 929-0319 Email: [email protected]

PROJECT: Ohana School of Early Learning

Specification: Title, Section, Page, Paragraph / Article

________________________________________________________________________________

Proposed Substitution: Description, Manufacturer, Model, Phone No., Trade Name

________________________________________________________________________________

Product Data: Drawings, Specifications, Performance Data, Test Data - Attached

The Undersigned Certifies: (Check each)

____ Substitution is equal or superior in all respects to specified item.

____ Will provide same warranty as specified item.

____ Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, are available.

____ Substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress

____ Substitution does not affect dimensions or functional clearances.

____ Will coordinate installation and adjust other work which may be required, at no additional cost

____ Waives claims for additional costs or time extensions which may subsequently become

____ Will reimburse Owner for review or design services for re-approval by authorities, for changes in building design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the substitutions.

Requested By: _____________________________________________________

Company: _____________________________________________________

Address: _____________________________________________________

Telephone: _____________________________________________________

Email: _____________________________________________________

Signature: _____________________________________________________

END OF DOCUMENT


01 1000 - SUMMARY

Page 1 of 2

SECTION 01 1000

SUMMARY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 PROJECT

A. Project Name: stem School and Academy – Barrons Building Phase 3

B. Owner: STEM School and Academy

C. Architect: 3890 Design, Inc.

F. Structural Engineer: Moser-Renn Structural Services, Inc.

G. Mechanical Engineer: Envision Mechanical Engineers, Inc.

H. Electrical Engineer: Ackerman Engineering, Inc.

I. Plumbing Engineer: Envision Mechanical Engineers, Inc.

J. Food Service Consultant: W. West Equipment & Furnishings.

K. The Project consists of partial tenant finish of an existing 60,152 sf. two story office building.

1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION

A. Contract Type: Construction Manager at Risk. Refer to Request for Proposal (RFP) for additional information.

1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Scope of work is shown on drawings and project manual, and includes:

1. Preconstruction Services (as described in Attachment B, Scope of Construction Manager At-Risk Services) to include value engineering of the design provided by the Owner’s Architect. During this phase, the Architect will have advanced the 100% level of completion. At the conclusion of the Preconstruction Phase, the CMAR will submit and negotiate a final Fixed Price for the delivery of the construction phase services.

2. Sitework; Includes, but not limited to; site clearing and stripping, re-working subgrade for new concrete sidewalk at new delivery entrance into the Cafeteria and grease interceptor.

3. General Construction; includes, but not limited to; two-story interior tenant finish, concrete slab-on-grade removal and replacement for installation of new plumbing, ballasted EPDM roofing repair for installation of new mechanical units and exhaust fans, metal-framed interior partitions with gypsum board finish, removal and replacement of suspended panel ceilings, stained concrete flooring, tile flooring, seamless vinyl flooring, carpeting and commercial kitchen. New aluminum storefront door for kitchen deliveries.

4. Mechanical; new rooftop units with VAV boxes, ducted supply and plenum return, kitchen make-up air unit, and exhaust fans for kitchen and toilet rooms. New staff and Kindergarten toilet rooms and new drinking fountains. New plumbing system with grease interceptor for kitchen.

5. Electrical; panels/distribution, lighting, power and data raceways.

1.04 OWNER OCCUPANCY

A. Owner intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion.

1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE

A. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner:

1. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit.

01 1000 - SUMMARY Page 2 of 2

B. Utility Outages and Shutdown:

1. Prevent accidental disruption of utility services to other facilities on site. Arrange any required shut-down or outages with Owner.

1.06 SPECIFICATION SECTIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL CONTRACTS

A. When certain items of equipment and other work are indicated as "NIC" (not in contract), or to be provided under other contracts, the Contractor shall properly form or prepare Work in a satisfactory manner to receive such "NIC" work. Contractor shall cooperate with other contractors, subcontractors, and suppliers providing such work.

1. Data cabling and equipment

2. Telephone cabling and equipment

3. Owner-provided furniture

4. Owner-provided Smart boards

5. Owner-provided projectors

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED

END OF SECTION


01 2000 - PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

Page 1 of 3

SECTION 01 2000

PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments.

B. Documentation of changes in Contract Sum and Contract Time.

C. Change procedures.

D. Procedures for preparation and submittal of application for final payment.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Document 00 5200 - Agreement Form: Contract Sum, retainages, payment period, monetary values of unit prices.

B. Request for Proposal, Construction Manager at Risk for the STEM School and Academy Barons Building – Phase 3 Construction issued by Integrated Delivery Solutions.

1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified; submit sample to Architect for approval.

B. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted.

C. Submit a printed schedule on AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered.

D. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement.

E. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the specification Section, and provide breakdown between materials and labor. Identify separate line item for Site Mobilization, Bonds and Insurance, and General Conditions.

F. Include within each line item, a direct proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit.

G. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application for Payment.

1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS

A. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement.

B. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form specified; submit sample to Architect for approval.

C. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted.

D. Present required information on electronic media printout.

E. Form: AIA G702 Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 - Continuation Sheet including continuation sheets when required.

F. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer.

G. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for portion of work performed and for stored Products.

H. List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of Work.

I. Submit three copies of each Application for Payment.

01 2000 - PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Page 2 of 3

J. Progress Payments:

1. The Owner will make payment to the Contractor based upon the total of Work Completed and Suitably Stored Materials.

2. The payment due will be equal to the sum of the Completed Work and Suitably Stored Materials, less 5% retainage to be held by the Owner until Completion of the Project, less previous payments.

3. Off-site stored material; payment may be requested for materials stored offsite. Contractor shall submit with Application written location where material is stored, evidence of payment for offsite stored materials, and certificate of insurance for offsite stored materials.

K. Include the following with the application:

1. Partial release of liens from major Subcontractors and vendors.

L. When Architect requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show application number and date, and line item by number and description.

1.05 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

A. Submit name of the individual authorized to receive change documents and who will be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ or subcontractors of changes to the Contract Documents.

B. For minor changes not involving an adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Time, Architect will issue instructions directly to Contractor.

C. For other required changes, Architect will issue a document signed by Owner instructing Contractor to proceed with the change, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. The document will describe the required changes and will designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time.

2. Promptly execute the change.

D. For changes for which advance pricing is desired, Architect will issue a document that includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change. Contractor shall prepare and submit a fixed price quotation within 10 days.

E. Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors.

F. Computation of Change in Contract Amount: Refer to Supplementary General Conditions Section 00-7300.

G. Substantiation of Costs: Provide full information required for evaluation.

1. Provide following data:

a. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment.

b. Taxes, insurance, and bonds.

c. Overhead and profit.

d. Justification for any change in Contract Time.

e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented.

01 2000 - PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Page 3 of 3

2. For Time and Material work, submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract.

H. Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract.

I. After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum.

J. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub-schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit.

K. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents.

1.06 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT

A. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due.

B. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been submitted and approved:

1. All closeout procedures specified in Section 01 7000.

2. Submittals as specified in Article 9 of General Conditions AIA A201.



END OF SECTION


01 2300 - ALTERNATES

Page 1 of 1

SECTION 01 2300

ALTERNATES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Description of alternates.


A. Document 00 5200 - Agreement Form: Incorporating monetary value of accepted alternatives.

1.03 ACCEPTANCE OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's option. Accepted alternates will be identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement.

B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each alternate.

1.04 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternates indicated are applicable to all building sites unless otherwise indicated for specific location.

B. Alternate #1 – Modify existing aluminum storefront window to add aluminum exterior door A143A and new concrete sidewalk and related site work as indicated on drawings.



END OF SECTION


01 3000 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

Page 1 of 5

SECTION 01 3000

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Preconstruction meeting.

B. Site mobilization meeting.

C. Progress meetings.

D. Construction progress schedule.

E. Progress photographs.

F. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout.

G. Number of copies of submittals.

H. Submittal procedures.


A. Document 00 7200 - General Conditions: Dates for applications for payment.

B. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements.

C. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. Architect will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award.

B. Attendance Required:

1. Owner.

2. Architect.

3. General contractor.

4. All major subcontractors.

C. Agenda:

1. Execution of Owner- Contractor Agreement.

2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates.

3. Distribution of Contract Documents.

4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and progress schedule.

5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract, and Architect.

6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures.

7. Scheduling.

D. Architect to record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with copies to Contractor, Owner. Contractor shall distribute to sub-contractors.

01 3000 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Page 2 of 5

3.02 SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING

A. Architect will schedule a meeting at the Project site prior to Contractor occupancy. Meeting will be combined with Pre-Construction Meeting.

B. Attendance Required:

1. Contractor.

2. Owner.

3. Architect.

4. Contractor's Superintendent.

5. Major Subcontractors.

C. Agenda:

1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor.

2. Owner's requirements.

3. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner.

4. Temporary utilities provided by Owner.

5. Survey and building layout.

6. Security and housekeeping procedures.

7. Schedules.

8. Application for payment procedures.

9. Procedures for testing.

10. Procedures for maintaining record documents.

11. Requirements for start-up of equipment.

12. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period.

D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly intervals.

B. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.

C. Agenda:

1. Review minutes of previous meetings.

2. Review of Work progress.

3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.

4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress.

5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.

6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.

7. Maintenance of progress schedule.

8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.


9. Planned progress during succeeding work period.

10. Maintenance of quality and work standards.

11. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.

12. Other business relating to Work.

D. Contractor to record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Contractor, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

A. Within 10 days after date of the Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned operations for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work.

B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days.

C. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for review.

1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule.

D. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule.

E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.

3.05 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Submit photographs with each application for payment, taken not more than 3 days prior to submission of application for payment.

B. Photography Type: Digital; electronic files.

C. Provide photographs of site and construction throughout progress of Work produced by an experienced photographer, acceptable to Architect.

D. Views:

1. Provide photos indicating new work and/or materials included in application for payment.

2. Photos to be grouped and referenced to site

3. Reference photos by view site location, identify location within building, and scope of work.

4. Photos to be date stamped.

E. Digital Photographs: 24 bit color, minimum resolution of 1024 by 768, in JPG format; provide files unaltered by photo editing software.

1. Delivery Medium: Via email.

2. File Naming: Include project identification, date and time of view, and view identification.

3. PDF File: Assemble all photos into printable pages in PDF format, with 2 to 3 photos per page, each photo labeled with file name; one PDF file per submittal.

4. Hard Copy: Printed hardcopy (grayscale) of PDF file and point of view sketch.

F. Deliver photos with each Application for Payment with transmittal letter specified in this Section.

3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:

1. Product data.

2. Shop drawings.


3. Samples for selection.

4. Samples for verification.

B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.

D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 7800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.

3.07 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information:

1. Design data.

2. Certificates.

3. Test reports.

4. Inspection reports.

5. Manufacturer's instructions.

6. Manufacturer's field reports.

7. Warranties for review. Final completed warranty to be submitted with Project Closeout.

8. Other types indicated.

B. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner.

3.08 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout:

1. Project record documents.

2. Operation and maintenance data.

3. Executed Warranties.

4. Bonds.

5. Other types as indicated.

B. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion.

3.09 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS

A. Documents: Submit one electronic copy in PDF format; an electronically-marked up file will be returned. Create PDFs at native size and right-side up; illegible files will be rejected.

B. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained by Architect.

1. After review, produce duplicates.

2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated.

3.10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Transmit each submittal with a copy of approved submittal form.

B. Transmit each submittal with approved form.

C. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential alphabetic suffix.


D. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy.

E. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.

F. Post submittals to internet cloud service as determined in Preconstruction Meeting.

G. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items.

H. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor.

I. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.

J. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps.

K. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.

L. Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements.

M. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.

END OF SECTION


01 4000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

Page 1 of 4

SECTION 01 4000

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. References and standards.

B. Quality assurance submittals.

C. Mock-ups.

D. Control of installation.

E. Tolerances.

F. Special Inspections Testing services. (By Owner, refer to 1.06)

G. Manufacturers' field services.


A. Document 00 7200 - General Conditions: Inspections and approvals required by public authorities.

B. Section 01 4216 - Definitions.

C. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged Construction Inspection and/or Testing; 2011.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Testing Agency Qualifications:

1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer.

2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST Construction Materials Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection.

B. Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information.

C. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and to Contractor.

1. Include:

a. Date issued.

b. Project title and number.

c. Name of inspector.

d. Date and time of sampling or inspection.

e. Identification of product and specifications section.

f. Location in the Project.

g. Type of test/inspection.

01 4000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 2 of 4

h. Date of test/inspection.

i. Results of test/inspection.

j. Conformance with Contract Documents.

k. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of results.

2. Test report submittals are for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information.

D. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data.

1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.

E. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.

F. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner.

1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

1.05 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS

A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code.

C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.

D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion.

E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.

F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of Architect shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.

1.06 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES

A. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform specified testing and Special Inspections Testing as scheduled in Structural Notes on Structural Drawings.

B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.


PART 3 EXECUTION

2.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.

C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.

D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.

F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer.

G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.

2.02 MOCK-UPS

A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections.

B. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes.

C. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work.

D. Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in product specification sections to be removed, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so.

2.03 TOLERANCES

A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.

B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.

C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.

2.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. Refer to Structural Drawings Structural Notes for required Special Inspections and Testing Schedule.

B. Testing Agency Duties:

1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services.

2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards.

3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.

4. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or products.

5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect.

6. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified.


C. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority:

1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.

2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.

3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor.

4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work.

D. Contractor Responsibilities:

1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs.

2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities.

3. Provide incidental labor and facilities:

a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected.

b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected.

c. To facilitate tests/inspections.

d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.

4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services.

5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.

6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.

E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect.

F. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor.

G. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect. Payment for re testing will be charged to the Contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract Price.

2.05 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES

A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.

B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.

2.06 DEFECT ASSESSMENT

A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements.

B. If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment.

END OF SECTION


01 4100 - REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

Page 1 of 1

SECTION 01 4100

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Regulatory Requirements

B. Permits, Fees, and Inspections

1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory requirements applicable to this project are the following:

B. Division of Childcare, Colorado Department of Human Services, Rules Regulating Childcare Centers; current edition

C. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design).

D. 29 CFR 1910 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition; as a work place.

E. ICC (IFC) - ICC International Fire Code, 2015.

F. ICC (IBC) - ICC International Building Code, 2015.

G. ICC (IEBC) - ICC International Existing Building Code, 2015.

H. ICC (IPC) - ICC International Plumbing Code, 2012.

I. ICC (IMC) - ICC International Mechanical Code, 2015.

J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; 2014.

K. ICC (IECC) - ICC International Energy Conservation Code, 2015.

L. 2010 ANSI A117.1

1.03 PERMITS, FEES, AND INSPECTIONS

A. Colorado Division of Fire Prevention and Control will issue building permit and perform construction inspections.

B. Owner has submitted contract documents to State for review for building permit.

C. Owner shall be responsible for applying for, obtaining, and paying fees for building permit review fees and third-party inspections fees.

D. Sub-contractors shall be responsible for obtaining and paying for any additional Mechanical, Electrical, and/or Plumbing permits required.

E. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and scheduling required inspections with the State of Colorado and Owner’s third-party inspectors.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Designer Qualifications: Where delegated engineering design is to be performed under the construction contract provide the direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in Colorado.



END OF SECTION


01 4216 - DEFINITIONS

Page 1 of 1

SECTION 01 4216

DEFINITIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Other definitions are included in individual specification sections.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Furnish: To supply, deliver, unload, and inspect for damage.

B. Install: To unpack, assemble, erect, apply, place, finish, cure, protect, clean, start up, and make ready for use.

C. Product: Material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the work result. Not materials or equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying, or erection and not incorporated into the work result. Products may be new, never before used, or re-used materials or equipment.

D. Provide: To furnish and install.

E. Supply: Same as Furnish.



END OF SECTION


01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

Page 1 of 2

SECTION 01 5000

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Temporary telecommunications services.

B. Temporary sanitary facilities.

C. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing.

D. Security requirements.

E. Vehicular access and parking.

F. Waste removal facilities and services.

G. Field offices.

H. Temporary Fuel Spill Containment


A. Section 01 5100 - Temporary Utilities.

1.03 TEMPORARY UTILITIES - SEE SECTION 01 5100

1.04 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES

A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of project mobilization.

B. Telecommunications services shall include:

1. Windows-based personal computer dedicated to project telecommunications, with necessary software and laser printer.

2. Telephone Land Lines: One line, minimum; one handset per line. At contractor's option may utilize cellular phone for communications.

3. Internet Connections: Minimum of one; DSL modem or faster.

1.05 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization.

B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition.

1.06 BARRIERS

A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition.

B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way and for public access to existing building.

C. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.

1.07 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES

A. Provide temporary insulated weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections,

01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Page 2 of 2

and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks.

1.08 SECURITY

A. Contractor shall be responsible to provide security and facilities to protect Work, stored materials, tools, and access to existing facilities through construction area from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft.

1.09 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING

A. Comply with regulations relating to use of streets and sidewalks, access to emergency facilities, and access for emergency vehicles.

B. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner.

C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions.

D. On-site parking may be arranged with Owner. Owner's Shops building parking may not be utilized by construction personnel. Owner will designate on site are to be utilized.

1.10 WASTE REMOVAL

A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition.

B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site weekly.

C. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids.

1.11 FIELD OFFICES

A. Office: Office space will be available for Contractor’s use within the existing building.

B. Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 6 persons.

1.12 TEMPORARY FUEL SPILL CONTAINMENT

A. Provide earthen berm or secondary containment around any on-site fuel storage.

B. General Contractor shall establish and post plan for containment of any fuel spills on site.

1.13 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS

A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities and materials prior to Substantial Completion inspection.

B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 4 feet. Grade site as indicated.

C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.

D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition.

E. Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.



END OF SECTION


01 5100 - TEMPORARY UTILITIES

Page 1 of 2

SECTION 01 5100

TEMPORARY UTILITIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, and water.


A. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Telephone service for administrative purposes and temporary sanitary facilities required by law.

1.03 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY

A. Cost of Energy: By Owner.

B. Cost of Temporary Services: By Contractor

C. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located as required. Each contractor/sub-contractor shall provide flexible power cords as required for their use.

D. Provide main service disconnect and over-current protection at convenient location.

E. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction.

1.04 TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES

A. Provide and maintain incandescent lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of 2 watt/sq ft.

B. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required.

C. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.

D. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction.

1. If new lighting system has been used for construction lighting, just prior to final inspection, remove temporary lamps and install new lamps.

1.05 TEMPORARY HEATING

A. Provide heating devices and heat as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations.

B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications.

C. Owner's new heat plant/equipment may be used during construction.

1. Exercise measures to conserve energy.

2. Enclose building prior to activating temporary heat.

D. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts.

1. Provide filters over open duct, supply, and/or return to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork.

2. Provide filter over all return air vents.

01 5100 - TEMPORARY UTILITIES Page 2 of 2

3. Replace all filters prior to substantial completion.

4. Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning any construction dust and/or debris from ductwork and equipment.

1.06 TEMPORARY COOLING

A. Cost of Energy: By Owner.

B. Provide cooling devices and cooling as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations.

C. Maintain maximum ambient temperature of 80 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications.

D. Owner's new cooling plant may be used.

1. Exercise measures to conserve energy.

2. Enclose building prior to activating temporary cooling.

E. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary cooling purposes, verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts.

1. Provide filters over open duct, supply, and/or return to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork.

2. Provide filter over all return air vents.

3. Replace all filters prior to substantial completion.

4. Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning any construction dust and/or debris from ductwork and equipment.

1.07 TEMPORARY VENTILATION

A. Provide temporary fans as may be required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations.

1.08 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE

A. Cost of Water Used: By Owner.

B. Provide and maintain suitable quality water service for construction operations at time of project mobilization. Provide temporary meter as required.

C. Exercise measures to conserve water.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable requirements indicated in Division 22 Plumbing, Division 23 Mechanical, and Division 26 Electrical

3.02 REMOVAL

A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment prior to substantial completion.

B. Clean and repair any damage caused by temporary installations.

C. Restore permanent facilities used for temporary services to their specified condition.

END OF SECTION


01 6000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

Page 1 of 4

SECTION 01 6000

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. General product requirements.

B. Re-use of existing products.

C. Transportation, handling, storage and protection.

D. Product option requirements.

E. Substitution limitations and procedures.

F. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software.


A. Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures prior to bid date.

B. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring.


A. GreenSeal GS-36 - Commercial Adhesives; Green Seal, Inc.; 2000.

B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

C. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product.

1. Submit within 15 days after date of Agreement.

2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards.

B. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project.

C. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.

D. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.

1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EXISTING PRODUCTS

A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents.

01 6000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Page 2 of 4

B. Existing materials and equipment indicated to be removed, but not to be re-used, relocated, reinstalled, delivered to the Owner, or otherwise indicated as to remain the property of the Owner, become the property of the Contractor; remove from site.

C. Reused Products: Reused products include materials and equipment previously used in this or other construction, salvaged and refurbished as specified.

2.02 NEW PRODUCTS

A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents.

B. Do not use products having any of the following characteristics:

1. Made outside the United States, its territories, Canada, or Mexico.

2. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's.

3. Made of wood from newly cut old growth timber.

C. Where all other criteria are met, Contractor shall give preference to products that:

1. Are extracted, harvested, and/or manufactured closer to the location of the project.

2. Have longer documented life span under normal use.

3. Result in less construction waste.

D. Adhesives and Joint Sealants:

1. Definition: This provision applies to gunnable, trowelable, and liquid-applied adhesives, sealants, and sealant primers used anywhere on the interior of the building inside the weather barrier, including duct sealers.

2. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168.

a. Require each installer to certify compliance and submit product data showing product content.

2.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description.

B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.

C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.

2.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections.

B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section.

B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents.

C. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter:


1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product.

2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.

3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.

4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent.

D. Substitution Submittal Procedure:

1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed substitution.

2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer.

3. The Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request.

3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials.

B. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas.

D. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.

E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

F. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible.

3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication.

B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.

D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product.

E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.

F. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection.

G. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products.

H. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining.

I. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.


J. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.

END OF SECTION


01 7000 - EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

Page 1 of 9

SECTION 01 7000

EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures.

B. Pre-installation meetings.

C. Surveying for laying out the work.

D. Cleaning and protection.

E. Starting of systems and equipment.

F. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel.

G. Closeout procedures, except payment procedures.

H. General requirements for maintenance service.


A. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Occupancy and work sequence.

B. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures.

C. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection procedures.

D. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary exterior enclosures.

E. Section 01 5100 - Temporary Utilities: Temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating facilities.

F. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance data, warranties and bonds.

G. Section 02 4123 - Site Selective Demolition;

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects:

1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.

2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element.

3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.

4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.

5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor.

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS

A. For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific service on Project, licensed in Colorado.

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment.

B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion.

01 7000 - EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Page 2 of 9

C. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.

D. Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later.

B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.

C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.

D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.

E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.

G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS

A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work.

B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard.

C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 01 6000.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached.

C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.

D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste and lost time due to over-ordering or misfabrication.

E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations.

F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work,


assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.

B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.

C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.

3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section.

B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section.

C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date.

D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting:

1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures.

2. Review coordination with related work.

3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORK

A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.

B. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered.

C. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction.

D. Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons.

E. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Architect.

F. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.

G. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means:

1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations.

2. Grid or axis for structures.

3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations.

H. Periodically verify layouts by same means.

I. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.

3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.

B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.


E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.

3.06 ALTERATIONS

A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation only.

1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown.

2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.

3. Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Keep areas in which alterations are being conducted separated from other areas that are still occupied.

1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction specified in Section 01 5000 in locations indicated on drawings.

C. Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for replacement or modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage.

1. Where openings in exterior enclosure exist, provide construction to make exterior enclosure weatherproof.

2. Insulate existing ducts or pipes that are exposed to outdoor ambient temperatures by alterations work.

D. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.

1. Remove rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete; replace with new construction specified.

2. Remove items indicated on drawings.

3. Relocate items indicated on drawings.

4. Where new surface finishes are to be applied to existing work, perform removals, patch, and prepare existing surfaces as required to receive new finish; remove existing finish if necessary for successful application of new finish.

5. Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicated, patch holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible.

E. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Electrical, and Telecommunications): Remove, relocate, and extend existing systems to accommodate new construction.

1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components; if necessary, modify installation to allow access or provide access panel.

2. Where existing systems or equipment are not active and Contract Documents require reactivation, put back into operational condition; repair supply, distribution, and equipment as required.

3. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service.

a. Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections; minimize duration of outages.

b. See Section 01 1000 for other limitations on outages and required notifications.

c. Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in service.

4. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities.


5. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, wire and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification; patch holes left by removal using materials specified for new construction.

F. Protect existing work to remain.

1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.

2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.

3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.

G. Adapt existing work to fit new work: Make as neat and smooth transition as possible.

1. When existing finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to Architect.

2. Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors, walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads.

3. Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs in existing work, submit recommendation for providing a smooth transition for Architect review and request instructions.

H. Patching: Where the existing surface is not indicated to be refinished, patch to match the surface finish that existed prior to cutting. Where the surface is indicated to be refinished, patch so that the substrate is ready for the new finish.

I. Refinish existing surfaces as indicated:

1. Where rooms or spaces are indicated to be refinished, refinish all visible existing surfaces to remain to the specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes.

2. If mechanical or electrical work is exposed accidentally during the work, re-cover and refinish to match.

J. Clean existing systems and equipment.

K. Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off-site; do not burn or bury.

L. Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete.

M. Comply with all other applicable requirements of this section.

3.07 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching.

B. See Alterations article above for additional requirements.

C. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to:

1. Complete the work.

2. Fit products together to integrate with other work.

3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services.

4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work.

5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition.

6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work.

7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.


8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.

D. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill to complete the work, to uncover work in order to install improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or non-conforming work, to remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work, to execute patching to complement adjacent work, and to fit products together to integrate with other work.

E. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition.

F. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.

G. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval.

H. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

I. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.

J. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 8400, to full thickness of the penetrated element.

K. Patching:

1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

2. Match color, texture, and appearance.

3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish.

L. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

M. Make neat transitions. Patch work to match adjacent work in texture and appearance. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition.

3.08 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition.

B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.

C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust.

D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site daily and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury.

3.09 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK

A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.

B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.

C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage.


D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.

E. Protect finished floors, stairs, bath tubs and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.

F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.

G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible.

3.10 SYSTEM STARTUP

A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.

B. Notify Architect and owner seven days prior to start-up of each item.

C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage.

D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer.

E. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.

F. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

G. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.

3.11 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION

A. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training.

3.12 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.

3.13 FINAL CLEANING

A. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.

B. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

C. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment.

D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned.

E. Replace filters of operating equipment.

F. Clean debris from roofs and drainage systems.

G. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.

H. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury.

3.14 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.

1. Provide copies to Architect.

2. Provide copies to Owner.


B. Accompany Owner's Representative on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for completion or correction in Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion.

C. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion.

D. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's review.

E. Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply with requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas.

F. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete.

G. Complete items of work determined by Architect's final inspection.

H. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

I. Submit final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include insurance certificates for products and completed operations.

J. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.

K. Submit consent of surety to final payment.

L. Final Application for Payment shall be made in accordance with General Conditions Article 9.10, Supplementary Conditions, and Owner-Contractor Agreement. Final closing, final acceptance, occupancy and Substantial Completion shall be determined by the Architect, Owner and the Owner's lender.

3.15 MAINTENANCE

A. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections.

B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever is longer.

C. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required.

D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component.

E. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of the Owner.

3.16 SITE STORAGE

A. All parties shall cooperate and coordinate to use the available areas most effectively and be concerned with the sequences of the Work of the Contract, which will best benefit the overall job progress. The Contractor shall establish and govern the use of the available space, with consideration to the needs of the Subcontractors to work effectively on the site.

B. Storage Areas: As determined by Contractor and Owner.

3.17 COORDINATION

A. Exterior work may begin immediately following receipt of Owner's Notice to Proceed and execution of Contract and receipt of required bonds and insurance. Interior rehabilitation of individual apartments will begin after Owner issues a pertinent Rehabilitation Notice.

B. All work in the streets shall be accomplished in conformance with Southpark and City of Littleton requirements and to a schedule as Southpark or the City of Littleton may require. The Contractor shall make his own arrangements.


C. Notice: The Contractor shall give adequate and timely notice to the Owner of various work phases and operations which will affect the work of, or will require installations or other action by others. After timely notification by the Contractor of the need to accomplish a particular phase or element of the Work, the Contractors shall, within a reasonable time, perform their work as not to delay or impede others or the progress of the Project.

D. Coordinate with other trades to locate joists and trusses where they will be least likely to be cut or notched for the work of other trades. Trusses are not to be cut or notched without specific written approval by the truss manufacturer's engineer.

END OF SECTION


01 7800 - CLOSE-OUT SUBMITTALS

Page 1 of 6

SECTION 01 7800

CLOSE-OUT SUBMITTALS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Project Record Documents.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data.

C. Warranties and bonds.

D. Energy Rebate Forms


A. Section 00 7200 - General Conditions: Performance bond and labor and material payment bonds, warranty, and correction of work.

B. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Electronic Submittals Procedures.

C. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures.

D. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data.

E. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Submit electronic documents to Architect .

B. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Submit one copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments.

2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance.

3. Submit one electronic copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be reviewed and returned, with Architect comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission.

4. Submit two printed sets and one electronic copy of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection.

C. Energy Rebate Forms

1. Complete and submit Energy Rebate Forms in accordance with Supplementary Conditions, Article 13.8.

D. Shop Drawing File:

1. An electronic copy of all final, approved shop drawing submittals, tracking logs, RFPs, RFI, and etc shall be submitted to the Owner by Project Website provider at Project Close-Out.

2. Refer to Section 01 3305 - Electronic Submittal Procedures.

E. Warranties and Bonds:

1. Submit Warranties and Bonds prior to Final Acceptance.

2. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance.

01 7800 - CLOSE-OUT SUBMITTALS Page 2 of 6

3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 REQUIRED CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS:

A. The following items must be submitted by the Contractor prior to issue of final payment by the Owner:

1. AIA G706; Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims

2. AIA G706A;Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens.

3. AIA G707; Consent of Surety to Final Payment

4. Operations and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with Section 01 7800.

5. Warranties in accordance with 01 7800.

6. Project Record Documents in accordance with Section 01 7800.

7. Electronic Submittals; Electronic copy of all electronic submittals from the Project Website, in accordance with Section 01 7800 and 01 3305.

8. Energy Rebate Forms; complete and submit in accordance with Article 13.8 of the Supplementary Conditions.

9. List of Extra Materials, see individual specification sections for required extra materials.

10. Final Punch List with all Items marked “COMPLETED”.

11. Keys, Keying Schedule, and Biting List in accordance with Section 08 71 00.

3.02 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain on site in the field office one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work:

1. Drawings.

2. Specifications.

3. Addenda.

4. Architectural Supplemental Information (ASI's)

5. Requests for Information and Responses (RFI's)

6. Request for Changes (RFC's)

7. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.

8. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.

9. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.

B. All recorded changes shall be "clouded" and identified. Make reference to the document that originated the change.

C. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.

D. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.

E. Record information concurrent with construction progress, not less than weekly. Provide status update as agenda item at regular progress meetings. Provide record documents for review during progress meetings when requested.


F. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following:

1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number of actual products installed.

2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized and approved.

3. Changes made by Addenda.

4. Changes made by the following:

a. Change Orders.

b. Architectural Supplemental Information (ASI's)

c. Requests for Information and Responses (RFI's)

d. Request for Changes (RFC's)

e. Changes documented by Meeting Notes or Field Reports and agreed to during Progress Meetings or Site Observations

G. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction on one "Record" set of drawings and Shop Drawings, including the following:

1. Changes made by Addenda

2. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum.

3. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.

4. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.

5. Actual Equipment locations.

6. Revisions to routing of piping and conduit.

7. Revisions to electrical circuitry.

8. Record information of any work that is described schematically in the Contract Documents

9. Field changes of dimensions and details

10. Details not on original Contract Documents

11. Changes made by the following:

a. Change Orders

b. Architectural Supplemental Information (ASI)

c. Responses to Requests for Information (RFI)

d. Request for Changes (RFC)

e. Changes documented by Meeting Notes or Field Reports discussed and agreed to during Progress Meetings or Site Observations.

H. Submit electronic (color scanned) copy of record documents at Project Closeout in accordance with Section 01 3000 Administrative Procedures

3.03 ENERGY REBATE FORMS

A. Contractor shall submit completed Energy Rebate Forms as required by the Supplementary General Conditions Article 13.8.

B. Obtain rebate forms from appropriate Utilities/Governing Agencies as required.


3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. O&M binders shall include all final, approved submittals that have been uploaded to the Closeout Tab of the Project Website. Do not submit O&M binders until all electronic copies of the required O&M and Warranty submittals have been uploaded to the Project Website and have achieved final approval.

B. Submit two (2) copies of O&M binders to the A/E. A/E shall review the O&M binders to verify completion. Contractor to make any corrections to the O&M binders noted and submit two (2) printed copies and one (1) electronic to the Owner upon final approval.

C. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description identified, as follows:

1. Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.

2. Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. Provide separate binders for Architectural, Mechanical, and Electrical.

3. For each system and/or component:

a. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.

b. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.

c. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams.

d. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data for Finishes and Materials

1. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish:

a. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations.

b. Information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.

2. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

3. Moisture protection and weather-exposed products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair.

4. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections.

5. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data for Systems and Equipment

1. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System:

a. Description of unit or system, and component parts.

b. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.


c. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests.

d. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.

2. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products.

3. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications; typed.

4. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed.

5. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.

6. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.

7. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.

8. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.

9. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.

10. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance.

11. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed.

12. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams.

13. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.

14. Include test and balancing reports.

15. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.

3.05 WARRANTIES AND BONDS

A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined.

B. Effective dates of warranties shall be the Date of Substantial Completion (not the date of installation) and must be identified on the warranty or by signed letter modifying the warranty.

C. Warranty shall include:

1. Product or work item, referenced to specification section.

2. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service maintenance contract.

3. Duration of warranty, bond, or service maintenance contract.

4. Contact for claim/failure

5. Proper procedures in case of failure

6. Instances which may affect validity of warranty or bond.

D. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized as required.


E. Co-execute submittals when required.

F. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. Submit two original signed copies of each to Architect with Closeout Submittals. In addition to hard copies, submit electronic copy in accordance with Section 01 3305 Electronic Submittal Procedures.

G. Include photocopies of each in operation and maintenance manuals, indexed separately on Table of Contents.

END OF SECTION


01 7900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

Page 1 of 4

SECTION 01 7900

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Demonstration of products and systems where indicated in specific specification sections.

B. Training of Owner personnel in operation and maintenance is required for:

1. All software-operated systems.

2. HVAC systems and equipment.

3. Plumbing equipment.

4. Electrical systems and equipment.

5. Items specified in individual product Sections.

C. Training of Owner personnel in care, cleaning, maintenance, and repair is required for:

1. Roofing, waterproofing, and other weather-exposed or moisture protection products.

2. Finishes, including flooring, wall finishes, and ceiling finishes.

3. Fixtures and fittings.

4. Items specified in individual product Sections.


A. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Operation and maintenance manuals.

B. Other Specification Sections: Additional requirements for demonstration and training.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Make all submittals specified in this section, and elsewhere where indicated for commissioning purposes, directly to the Commissioning Authority.

2. Submit one copy to the Commissioning Authority, not to be returned.

3. Make commissioning submittals on time schedule specified by Commissioning Authority.

4. Submittals indicated as "Draft" are intended for the use of the Commissioning Authority in preparation of overall Training Plan; submit in editable electronic format, Microsoft Word 2003 preferred.

B. Training Plan: Owner will designate personnel to be trained; tailor training to needs and skill-level of attendees.

1. Submit to Architect for transmittal to Owner.

2. Submit to Commissioning Authority for review and inclusion in overall training plan.

3. Submit not less than four weeks prior to start of training.

4. Revise and resubmit until acceptable.

5. Provide an overall schedule showing all training sessions.

6. Include at least the following for each training session:

a. Identification, date, time, and duration.

01 7900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING Page 2 of 4

b. Description of products and/or systems to be covered.

c. Name of firm and person conducting training; include qualifications.

d. Intended audience, such as job description.

e. Objectives of training and suggested methods of ensuring adequate training.

f. Methods to be used, such as classroom lecture, live demonstrations, hands-on, etc.

g. Media to be used, such a slides, hand-outs, etc.

h. Training equipment required, such as projector, projection screen, etc., to be provided by Contractor.

C. Training Manuals: Provide training manual for each attendee; allow for minimum of two attendees per training session.

1. Include applicable portion of O&M manuals.

2. Include copies of all hand-outs, slides, overheads, video presentations, etc., that are not included in O&M manuals.

3. Provide one extra copy of each training manual to be included with operation and maintenance data.

D. Training Reports:

1. Identification of each training session, date, time, and duration.

2. Sign-in sheet showing names and job titles of attendees.

3. List of attendee questions and written answers given, including copies of and references to supporting documentation required for clarification; include answers to questions that could not be answered in original training session.

4. Provide executed copy of O&M Training Certificate (included at the end of this section) for each session.


A. Instructor Qualifications: Familiar with design, operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of the relevant products and systems.

1. Provide as instructors the most qualified trainer of those contractors and/or installers who actually supplied and installed the systems and equipment.

2. Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects, provide specialists with necessary qualifications.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 DEMONSTRATION - GENERAL

A. Demonstrations conducted during system start-up do not qualify as demonstrations for the purposes of this section, unless approved in advance by Owner.

B. Demonstrations conducted during Functional Testing need not be repeated unless Owner personnel training is specified.

C. Demonstration may be combined with Owner personnel training if applicable.

D. Operating Equipment and Systems: Demonstrate operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-down, seasonal changeover, emergency conditions, and troubleshooting, and maintenance procedures, including scheduled and preventive maintenance.

1. Perform demonstrations prior to Substantial Completion of individual buildings.


2. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months.

E. Non-Operating Products: Demonstrate cleaning, scheduled and preventive maintenance, and repair procedures.

1. Perform demonstrations prior to Substantial Completion of individual buildings.

3.02 TRAINING - GENERAL

A. Conduct training on-site unless otherwise indicated.

B. Owner will provide classroom and seating at no cost to Contractor.

C. Do not start training until Functional Testing is complete, unless otherwise specified or approved by the Commissioning Authority.

D. Provide training in minimum two hour segments.

E. The Commissioning Authority is responsible for determining that the training was satisfactorily completed and will provide approval forms.

F. Training schedule will be subject to availability of Owner's personnel to be trained; re-schedule training sessions as required by Owner; once schedule has been approved by Owner failure to conduct sessions according to schedule will be cause for Owner to charge Contractor for personnel "show-up" time.

G. Review of Facility Policy on Operation and Maintenance Data: During training discuss:

1. The location of the O&M manuals and procedures for use and preservation; backup copies.

2. Typical contents and organization of all manuals, including explanatory information, system narratives, and product specific information.

3. Typical uses of the O&M manuals.

H. Product- and System-Specific Training:

1. Review the applicable O&M manuals.

2. For systems, provide an overview of system operation, design parameters and constraints, and operational strategies.

3. Review instructions for proper operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-down, seasonal changeover and emergency procedures, and for maintenance, including preventative maintenance.

4. Provide hands-on training on all operational modes possible and preventive maintenance.

5. Emphasize safe and proper operating requirements; discuss relevant health and safety issues and emergency procedures.

6. Discuss common troubleshooting problems and solutions.

7. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation.

8. Discuss warranties and guarantees, including procedures necessary to avoid voiding coverage.

9. Review recommended tools and spare parts inventory suggestions of manufacturers.

10. Review spare parts and tools required to be furnished by Contractor. (See individual Sections and Section 01780.)

11. Review spare parts suppliers and sources and procurement procedures.


I. Be prepared to answer questions raised by training attendees; if unable to answer during training session, provide written response within three days.

END OF SECTION


02 4100 - DEMOLITION

Page 1 of 4

SECTION 02 4100

DEMOLITION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Selective demolition of building elements for alterations purposes.

B. Demolition of existing landscape and sod for new underground utilities and sidewalk.

C. Selective demolition of roof, roof deck and floor deck for new mechanical equipment and ductwork.


A. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises.

B. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers, and waste removal.

C. Section 01 5713 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control.

D. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of bench marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation of removed products.

E. Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of removed materials; requirements for recycling.


A. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2004.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities and subsurface construction.


A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Company specializing in the type of work required.

1. Minimum of five years of documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SCOPE

A. Remove portions of the existing building as required for alterations work and as indicated on drawings.

B. Remove sod as required to accomplish new work.


Page 2 of 4

3.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Comply with other requirements specified in Section 01 7000.

B. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public.

1. Obtain required permits.

2. Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 241.

3. Use of explosives is not permitted.

4. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures.

5. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices.

6. Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public.

7. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and occupants.

8. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit.

9. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations.

C. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner.

D. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed.

1. Provide bracing and shoring.

2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures.

3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger.

E. Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations; do not use water if that will result in ice, flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution.

F. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify Architect and Owner; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCB's, and mercury.

G. Perform demolition in a manner that maximizes salvage and recycling of materials.

1. Comply with requirements of Section 01 7419 - Waste Management.

2. Dismantle existing construction and separate materials.

3. Set aside reusable, recyclable, and salvageable materials; store and deliver to collection point or point of reuse.

H. Partial Removal of Paving and Curbs: Neatly saw cut at right angle to surface.

3.03 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their requirements; obtain required permits.

B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage.

C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction.


Page 3 of 4

D. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7 days prior written notification to Owner.

E. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take-offs that are in use without at least 3 days prior written notification to Owner.

F. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags, with identification of utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades if necessary.

G. Remove exposed piping, valves, meters, equipment, supports, and foundations of disconnected and abandoned utilities.

H. Prepare building demolition areas by disconnecting and capping utilities outside the demolition zone; identify and mark utilities to be subsequently reconnected, in same manner as other utilities to remain.

3.04 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS

A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only.

1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown.

2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.

3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition.

B. Separate areas in which demolition is being conducted from other areas that are still occupied.

1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction specified in Section 01 5000.

C. Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for replacement or modifications; take care to prevent water and humidity damage.

D. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.

1. Remove items indicated on drawings.

E. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Electrical, and Telecommunications): Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated.

1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment and operational components.

2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service.

3. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal.

4. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification.

F. Protect existing work to remain.

1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.

2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.

3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.


Page 4 of 4

4. Patch as specified for patching new work.

3.05 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL

A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site.

B. Remove from site all materials not to be reused on site; comply with requirements of Section 01 7419 - Waste Management.

C. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.

D. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands.

END OF SECTION


03 3300 - CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE

Page 1 of 12

SECTION 03300

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of

materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication, bending, and placement, prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures.

D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing of current materials:

E. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements:

1. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Admixtures. 4. Adhesives. 5. Repair materials.

F. Minutes of preinstallation conference.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for formwork and shoring and reshoring installations that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association's Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities.

03 3000 - CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE Page 2 of 12

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the same manufacturer.

F. ACI Publications: Comply with the following most-current editions, unless more stringent provisions are indicated:

1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete." 2. ACI 318, “Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary” 3. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 4. ACI 305, “Hot Weather Concreting” 5. ACI 306, “Cold Weather Concreting”

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."

1. Before submitting design mixes, review concrete mix design and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixes. c. Ready-mix concrete producer. d. Concrete subcontractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,

and as follows:

a. High-density overlay, Class 1, or better. b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1, or better, mill-release agent treated and edge

sealed. c. Structural 1, B-B, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed. d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1, or better, mill oiled and edge sealed.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

1. Forms for the outside face of foundation walls around the building perimeter shall be rough sawn lumber that results in rough-sawn lumber exterior finish.

C. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

D. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.


1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of the exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in concrete surface.

3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M

2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II unless otherwise specified by the soil engineer following an open hole investigation.

B. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica. C. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, uniformly graded, and as follows:

1. Class: Moderate weathering region, but not less than 3M. 2. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) for foundations 3. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (25 mm) for slabs

D. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94.

2.5 ADMIXTURES

A. General: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other admixtures and cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride.

B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. D. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F. E. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E. F. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.

2.6 FLOOR AND SLAB TREATMENTS

A. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive aggregate of fused aluminum-oxide granules or crushed emery with emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 25 percent ferric oxide; unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials.

B. Unpigmented Mineral Dry-Shake Floor Hardener: Factory-packaged dry combination of portland cement, graded quartz aggregate, and plasticizing admixture.

C. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; colorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces.

2.7 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.


B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Solvent-Borne or Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309,

Type 1, Class B.

2.8 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. B. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork. C. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or

self-expanding cork. D. Epoxy Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Shore A

hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240. E. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene

butadiene. F. Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing

and bonding to damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit requirements, and as follows:

1. Type II, non-load bearing, for bonding freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. 2. Types I and II, non-load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to

hardened concrete. 3. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to

hardened concrete.

2.9 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

B. Repair Topping: Traffic-bearing, cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6 mm).

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5700 psi (39 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.10 CONCRETE MIXES

A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or field test data bases, as follows:

1. Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301.


B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the laboratory trial mix basis.

C. Foundation Walls & Exterior Slab-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4500 psi (31.1 MPa). D. Interior Slab-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi (27.6 MPa).

E. Cementitious Materials: For concrete exposed to deicers, limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements.

F. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. 3. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent. 4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent

portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent. 5. Silica Fume: 10 percent. 6. Combined Fly Ash, Pozzolans, and Silica Fume: 35 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not

exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent. 7. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolans, Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag, and Silica

Fume: 50 percent portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent.

G. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45 for concrete required to have low water permeability.

H. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.40 for corrosion protection of steel reinforcement in concrete exposed to chlorides from deicing chemicals, salt, saltwater, brackish water, seawater, or spray from these sources.

I. Air Content: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 percent, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Air Content: 4.5 percent for 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) nominal maximum aggregate size. 2. Air Content: 5 percent for 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) nominal maximum aggregate size or

smaller

J. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement.

K. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.40.

4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixes where indicated.

2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.12 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94, and furnish batch ticket information.

B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.


1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least one and one-half minutes, but not more than five minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released.

2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m).

3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm)for slabs 2. Class C, 1/2 inch (13 mm) for foundations

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.

Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.

1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations, slopes and textures in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads

required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt,

and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and

maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor bolts, accurately located, to elevations required.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work, that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not


be damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained.

B. Leave formwork, for structural elements that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved the following:

1. At least 70 percent of 28-day design compressive strength.

C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.

E. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. F. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials. G. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and

support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

H. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

3.4 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at

locations indicated or as approved by the Architect and Engineer. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning

concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness, as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 PLACEMENT CONCRETE

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement, unless approved by Architect.

C. Before placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mix.

D. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

E. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.


1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.

F. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows, when hot-weather conditions exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm) in height.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, damp-proofing, veneer plaster, or painting.

2. Do not apply rubbed finish to smooth-formed finish.

B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished concrete base at entry column:

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

3.7 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system

2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, measured within 24 hours according to ASTM E 1155/E 1155M for a randomly trafficked floor surface:

a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and levelness, F(L) 15; for suspended slabs.


3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled freestanding 10-foot- (3.05-m-) long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed 3/16” (4.8mm).

C. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second troweling, to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

D. Medium Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

3.8 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or a combination of the methods listed below.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors slabs, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.


c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer recommends for use with floor coverings.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.10 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs.

2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than seven days old. 3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet; and

repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.

B. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.11 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six months. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid epoxy joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.2-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match


before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

6. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.

3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement according to requirements specified in this Article.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include those specified in this Article.

C. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.


3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

a. Cast and field cure one set of four standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and two at 28 days.

a. Test two field-cured specimens at 7 days and two at 28 days. b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two

specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

D. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

E. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).

F. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests.

G. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

H. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect.

END OF SECTION 03300


05 5000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

Page 1 of 4

SECTION 05500

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Shop fabricated steel items, including:

1. Wide Flange Beams

2. Cold Formed Hollow Structural Sections

3. Misc. Support Angle Framing

4. Cold Formed Steel Studs

5. Metal Decking

6. Steel Handrails

7. Guardrail Extension Brackets


A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals

B. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Placement of metal fabrications in masonry.

C. Section 06 1000 – Rough Carpentry

D. Section 09 9000 - Paints and Coatings: Paint finish.


A. ASTM A 992/A 992M – Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes, 2011

B. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel, 2012

C. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2010.

D. ASTM A 1003 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and Nonmetallic Coated Cold-Formed Framing Members

E. AISI – North American Specification (NASPEC) for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members

F. Steel Deck Institute (SDI) - Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks

1. D. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2009.

G. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009.

H. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2009a.

I. ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile Strength (Metric); 2009.

J. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2010a.

K. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination;


Page 2 of 4

American Welding Society; 2007.

L. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.

M. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004).

N. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).

O. ANSI A14.3 - American National Standard for Ladders -- Fixed -- Safety Requirements; 2008.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Project Coordination, for submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable.

1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.


A. Design under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in Colorado.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M, Grade 50.

B. Steel Sections, Plates, Channels and Angles: ASTM A36/A36M.

C. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M where connecting galvanized components.

D. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.

E. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural tubing.

F. Cold Formed Steel: ASTM A 1003, 33 ksi minimum yield strength

G. Metal Decking: ASTM A653, 33 ksi minimum yield strength

H. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

I. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

J. Anchor bolts: ASTM F1554, 36 ksi minimum

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.

B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.

C. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds.

D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Fill any remaining voids with plastic filler and sand smooth. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

E. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related


Page 3 of 4

components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.

2.03 FABRICATED ITEMS

A. Ledge Angles Not Attached to Structural Framing: For support of metal decking; prime paint finish..

B. Structural Steel Sections: For reinforcement of existing structure

C. Non-composite Metal Decking: At over-framed slab on metal deck ramp

D. Cold Formed Steel Studs and Accessories: For interior walls and bearing walls at over-framed ramp

2.04 FINISHES - STEEL

A. Prime paint all steel items.

1. Exceptions

a. Galvanized Glue-Laminated Connections.

b. Galvanized Entry Sign fabrication

c. Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete or masonry.

d. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete, where field welding is required, and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing.

B. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.

C. Prime Painting: One coat, red oxide.

D. Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements.

E. Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements.

2.05 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements.

B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch.

C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch.

D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches.

E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.

B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.


Page 4 of 4

C. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

D. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.

E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete.

3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.

B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.

C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.

END OF SECTION


06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

Page 1 of 5

SECTION 06 1000

ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Non-structural dimension lumber framing..

B. Interior sheathing.

E. Preservative treated wood materials.

G. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.

H. Miscellaneous wood nailers, furring, and grounds.


A. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation; insulated foam sheathing

B. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Air barrier over insulated sheathing.

C. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Water-resistive barrier over sheathing.


A. AFPA (WFCM) - Wood Frame Construction Manual for One- and Two-Family Dwellings; American Forest and Paper Association; 2012.

B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009.

C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.

D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2013a.

E. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood Protection Association; 2012.

F. PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels; National Institute of Standards and Technology, U.S. Department of Commerce; 2010.

G. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology, Department of Commerce; 2010.

H. WWPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules; Western Wood Products Association; 2011.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials.

C. Structural Composite Lumber: Submit manufacturer's published structural data including span tables, marked to indicate which sizes and grades are being used; if structural composite lumber is being substituted for dimension lumber or timbers, submit grading agency structural tables marked for comparison.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or exceed specified requirements and required design values as indicated on structural drawings.

06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY Page 2 of 5

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.

1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements.

2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated.

B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.

2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER

A. Grading Agency: Western Wood Products Association (WWPA).

B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.

C. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.

D. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring:

1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2.

2. Boards: No. 2.

2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A. Wood panels shall conform to the following requirements:

1. US Products Standard PS 1 for construction and industrial plywood.

2. US Products PS 2 performance standard for wood based structural-use panels.

3. APA PRP-108 Performance Standards

C. Wall Sheathing:

1. 1/2" CDX APA Rated sheathing, Structural 1

2. Bond Classification: Exposure 1.

3. Span Rating: 32/16

4. Edge Profile: Square edge.

5. At contractor’s option, OSB with equivalent criteria may be used.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors:

1. Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.


2. Nails and staples shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F 1667 and NER-272.

3. Nails shall be identified labels (attached to their containers) that show the manufacturer's name, NES Report, nail shank diameter, and length.

4. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity, exterior, and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.

5. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry.

6. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

B. Bolts and Lag Screws:

1. Conform to ANSI/ASME Standard B18.2.1

2. Bolt holes shall be at least a minimum 1/32" and no more than 1/16" larger than the bolt diameter

3. All bolts and lag screws shall be installed with standard cut washers.

4. All A307 bolts shall have cut threads.

5. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M

C. Metal Framing Connectors:

1. Manufacturer:

a. Simpson Strongtie

b. Substitutions; obtain prior approval for alternate manufacturer. Submit manufacturer's published testing data and load capacity for engineer's review and written approval.

2. Refer to structural drawings for framing connector types.

3. Finish:

a. Interior locations; Galvanized-Steel Sheet, Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation..

2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT

A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications.

1. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards.

B. Preservative Treatment:

1. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb./cu ft. retention.

a. (CA) Copper Azole.Micronized.

b. With manufacturer's integral water repellent

c. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

d. Treat lumber exposed to weather.

e. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing.

f. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete.

g. Treat lumber less than 6 inches above grade.


h. Treat lumber in other locations as indicated.

2. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Plywood Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC2 and UC3B, Commodity Specification F using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb./cu ft. retention.

a. (CA) Copper Azole.Micronized.

b. With manufacturer's integral water repellent

c. Kiln dry plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

d. Treat plywood in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing.

e. Treat plywood in contact with masonry or concrete.

f. Treat plywood less than 6 inches above grade.

g. Treat plywood in other locations as indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.

3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Select material sizes to minimize waste.

B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.

C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.

D. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

E. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.

2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.

3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.

4. Refer to structural drawings for additional/more stringent requirements.

F. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered.

G. Provide treated wood where in direct contact with concrete elements.

3.03 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

B. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated.

C. Specifically, provide the following non-structural framing and blocking:


1. Cabinets and shelf supports.

2. Grab bars.

3. Towel and bath accessories.

4. Wall-mounted door stops.

5. All wall and ceiling mounted equipment.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A. Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension parallel to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing and staggered, using screws.

1. Space panels 1/8" apart at edges and ends.

3.05 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT

A. Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site-sawn cuts, complying with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.

3.06 TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum.

3.08 CLEANING

A. Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of Section 01 7419.

1. Comply with applicable regulations.

2. Do not burn scrap on project site.

3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated.

4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation facilities or “waste-to-energy” facilities.

B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill.

C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.

END OF SECTION


06 4100 - ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK

Page 1 of 5

SECTION 06 4100

ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Specially fabricated cabinet units.

B. Countertops.

C. Cabinet hardware.


A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking.


A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.

B. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting not less than one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and accessories.

1. Minimum Scale of Detail Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot.

C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience.


A. Protect units from moisture damage.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CABINETS

A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI//AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Custom Grade.

B. Cabinets: Plastic laminate.

1. Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Decorative laminate.

2. Exposed Interior Surfaces: At manufacturer's option, Decorative Laminate, Cabinet Liner, Melamine.

06 4100 - ARCHITECTURAL MILLWORK Page 2 of 5

3. Concealed Surfaces: Manufacturer's option.

4. Door and Drawer Front Edge Profiles: square edge with plastic laminate.

5. Casework Construction Type: Type A - Frameless.

6. Cabinet Style: Flush overlay.

7. Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts: Flush style.

2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS

A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.

B. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2; type as specified in AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; composed of wood fibers pressure bonded with moisture resistant adhesive to suit application; sanded faces; thickness as required.

1. Urea-formaldehyde free.

2. Use as backing for plastic laminate

3. Use as backing for select white birch veneer panels

C. Concealed Solid Wood: poplar, pine, fir

D. Exposed Solid Wood: Select white birch

E. Exposed Plywood: Select white birch

1. Thickness: 3/4 inch

2. Edging: Veneer edge band to match

2.03 LAMINATE MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Formica Corporation: www.formica.com.

2. Panolam Industries International, Inc\Nevamar: www.nevamar.com.

3. Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com.

4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specific applications.

C. Provide specific types as follows:

1. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard, matte finish

2. Horizontal and Vertical Surfaces: 10/HGS, 0.048 inch nominal thickness, Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard, matte finish. .

3. Cabinet Liner: CLS, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, white color, matte finish.

4. Laminate Backer: BKL, 0.020 inch nominal thickness, undecorated; for application to concealed backside of panels faced with high pressure decorative laminate.

2.04 COUNTERTOPS

A. Plastic Laminate Countertops with separate 4" backsplash

1. Medium density fiberboard substrate covered with HPDL.

2. Square edge profile with 3mm PVC edge at counters.

3. Square edge profile with 3mm PVC edge at backsplashes.


2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application.

B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.

C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized or chrome-plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel or chrome-plated finish in exposed locations.

D. Grommets: Standard plastic grommets for cut-outs, in color to match adjacent surface.

1. 2 1/2" diameter

2. With plastic cover with cord cut-out.

2.06 HARDWARE

A. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using recessed metal shelf standards or multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated self-rests, plastic non-tipping, for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments.

B. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, steel with satin finish, 4 inch centers.

C. Drawer Slides:

1. Type: Full extension.

2. Static Load Capacity: Commercial grade.

3. Mounting: Side mounted.

4. Stops: Integral type.

5. Features: Provide self-closing/stay closed type with soft close.

6. Manufacturers:

a. Accuride International, Inc: www.accuride.com.

b. Grass America Inc: www.grassusa.com.

c. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company: www.knapeandvogt.com.

d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

D. Hinges: European style concealed self-closing type with soft close feature, BHMA No. A156.9 steel with satin finish.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Grass America Inc; www.grassusa.com.

b. Julius Blum, Inc; www.blum.com.

c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

F. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, tumbler lock, two keys per lock, steel with satin finish. Provide locks at all doors and drawers except in Resource/Lounge 123

G. Catches: Elbow catch, nickel.

H. Adjustable Shelves and Standards:

1. Manufacturer: Knape & Vogt or equal

2. Wall Standard; #87, heavy duty standard, surface mounted, 2" adjustment slots, anochrome finish.

3. Brackets; #161 Heavy duty lock lever bracket, length as required for shelf depth indicated.


a. #212 Front Rest, for anchoring shelf to bracket

4. Installation

a. Provide L-brackets at 32" oc max

b. Coordinate exact spacing with owner-provided file cabinets.

I. Countertop Supports:

1. Manufacturer: Knape & Vogt or equal

2. L-Bracket: 208 Series Ultimate L-Bracket – 22” x 22”

3. Installation

a. Provide standard and brackets at 36" oc. maximum

J. Coat Hook:

1. Manufacturer: Ives #580 Ceiling Hook with A15 Satin Nickel finish or equal

K. Book Lift Mechanism:

1. Manufacturer: Weber Knapp Company #9574-1 or equal

a. 50 lb. load

L. Casters:

1. Manufacturer: Revvo Plate Casters # TSED 050 RN0D and #TFED 050 RN0D or equal

a. Capacity: 110 lb.

b. Wheel material: Rubber

c. Style:

i. (2) swivel

ii. (2) fixed

2.07 WOOD TRIM

A. Material indicated for stain finish:

1. Select White Birch (To match wood doors)

2. Stain finish, refer to Section 09 9000 - Painting

3. 1x as indicated on drawings

4. As indicated on drawings, including:

a. Hallway wood trim

2.08 FABRICATION

A. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings.

B. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than one piece for any single length.

C. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting.

D. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs.


1. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces.

2. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern.

E. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops as recommended by laminate manufacturer at 16 inches on center.

F. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Prime paint cut edges.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.

B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.

B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.

C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units.

D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.

E. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 075323

ETHYLENE PROPYLENE DIENE MONOMER (EPDM) MEMBRANE ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. EPDM Ballasted membrane roofing system repairs and flashing at new rooftop mechanical equipment.

B. Cover board.

C. Roof insulation.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, cants, curbs, and blocking.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to the following publications for definitions of roofing work related terms used in this Section:

1. ASTM D 1079 “Terminology Relating to Roofing and Waterproofing.” 2. Glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." 3. Roof Consultants Institute “Glossary of Roofing Terms.”

B. Sheet Metal Terminology and Techniques: SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

1.4 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. General: Installed roofing membrane systems shall remain watertight; and resist specified wind uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure.

B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. Wind Uplift Performance: Roofing system shall be identical to systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist wind uplift pressure calculated in accordance with ASCE-7.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets for each product to be provided.

B. Detail Drawings: Provide roofing system plans, elevations, sections, details, and details of attachment to other Work, including:

1. Base flashings, cants, and membrane terminations. 2. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 3. Crickets, saddles, and tapered edge strips, including slopes. 4. Insulation fastening patterns.

C. Verification Samples: Provide for each product specified.

D. Maintenance Data: Refer to Johns Manville’s latest published documents on www.specJM.com.

E. Guarantees: Special guarantees specified in this Section.

07 5323 – ETHYLENE PROPYLENE DIENE MONOMER (EPDM) MEMBRANE ROOFING Page 2 of 8


A. Installer Qualifications: Qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and is eligible to receive the specified manufacturer's guarantee.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Qualified manufacturer that has UL listing for roofing system identical to that used for this Project.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented in accordance with ASTM E 548.

D. Test Reports:

1. Core cut (if requested). 2. Roof deck fastener pullout test.

E. Moisture Survey:

1. Submit prior to installation, results of a non-destructive moisture test of roof system completed by approved third party. Utilize one of the approved methods:

a. Infrared Thermography b. Nuclear Backscatter

F. Source Limitations: Obtain all components from the single source roofing system manufacturer guaranteeing the roofing system. All products used in the system must be labeled by the single source roofing system manufacturer issuing the guarantee.

G. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Roofing materials shall comply with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL[, FMG,] or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated.

2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119, for fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies of which roofing system is a part.


A. Deliver roofing materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storage.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when current and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and guarantee requirements.


1.9 GUARANTEES

A. Provide manufacturer's system guarantee equal to Johns Manville's Peak Advantage No Dollar Limit Roofing System Guarantee.

1. Single-Source special guarantee includes roofing plies, base flashings, liquid applied flashing, roofing membrane accessories, roof insulation, fasteners, walkway products, manufacturer’s edge metal products, and other single-source components of roofing system marketed by the manufacturer.

2. Guarantee Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

3. Provide roof flashing system and repairs to maintain existing Johns Manville roof warranty.

B. Installer’s Guarantee: Submit roofing Installer's guarantee signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including all components of roofing system for the following guarantee period:

1. Guarantee Period: Five Years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ETHYLENE PROPYLENE DIENE MONOMER ROOFING MEMBRANE - EPDM

A. Non-reinforced uniform, flexible sheet made from Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer, ASTM D 4637, Type I. Basis of Design: Johns Manville EPDM NR, Johns Manville EPDM Nonreinforced to maintain existing roofing warranty.

1. Thickness (minimum): 60 mils (1.5 mm) 2. Exposed Face Color: Black.

2.2 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS – SINGLE PLY

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing.

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement, thickness, and color as sheet membrane. Basis of Design: JM EPDM Peel & Stick Flashing.

C. Primer Material: Manufacturer’s standard synthetic-rubber polymer primer. Basis of Design: JM EPDM Tape Primer/Wash.

D. Seaming Material: Manufacturer's standard 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide minimum, butyl splice tape with release film. Basis of Design: JM EPDM Seam Tape.

E. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard solvent-based bonding adhesive for membrane, and solvent-based bonding adhesive for base flashings. Basis of Design: JM EPDM Bonding Cement (Solvent Based).

F. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application.

G. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, with anchors. Basis of Design: JM Termination Systems.

H. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet, prepunched. Basis of Design: Membrane Battens.

I. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. Basis of Design: High Load Pre-Assembled Fasteners

J. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, termination


reglets, cover strips, sealants and other accessories. Basis of Design: JM EPDM Peel & Stick Flashing, JM EPDM Peel & Stick Inside/Outside Corners, JM EPDM Peel & Stick Pipe Boots, JM EPDM Peel & Stick Pourable Sealer Pockets, JM EPDM Peel & Stick Sealing Strips, JM EPDM Peel & Stick T-Joint Patch, JM EPDM Protective Stone Mat, JM EPDM Reinforced Termination Strip (RTS),] and JM Single Ply Caulk.

2.3 AUXILIARY ROOFING SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Metal Flashing Sheet: Metal flashing sheet is specified in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

2.4 WALKWAYS

A. Concrete Walkways: 2’ x 2’ x 2” Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured concrete walkway pads to match existing concrete walkway pads.

2.5 COVER BOARD

A. Perlite Board: ASTM C 728; composed of expanded perlite, cellulosic fibers, binders and waterproofing agents with top surface seal-coated. Basis of Design: 1” Fesco Board. Match existing thickness.

B. High-Density Polyisocyanurate: High-density polyisocyanurate technology bonded in-line to mineral-surfaced, fiber glass reinforced facers with greater than 125 lbs of compressive strength. Basis of Design: Invinsa Roof Board. Match existing thickness.

2.6 ROOF INSULATION

A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and referenced standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses indicated.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Basis of Design: ENRGY 3.

1. Match existing insulation thickness.

2.7 TAPERED INSULATION

A. Tapered Insulation: ASTM C 1289, provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated. Basis of Design: Tapered ENRGY 3.

2.8 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing.

B. Provide factory preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. Basis of Design: Tapered Pre-Cut Cricket.

C. Urethane Adhesive: Manufacturer’s two component urethane adhesive formulated to adhere insulation to substrate. Basis of Design: JM Two-Part Urethane Insulation Adhesive.

D. Wood Nailer Strips: Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with the requirements affecting performance of roofing system.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and remove from substrate sharp projections, dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation in accordance with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction.

C. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at a rate recommended by roofing manufacturer and allow primer to dry.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 PATCHING PREPARATION

A. Prepare existing roof according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, applicable recommendations of the roofing manufacturer, and requirements in this Section.

B. Tear out all base flashings, counterflashings, pitch pans, pipe flashings, vents and like components necessary for application of new membrane.

C. Disable existing roof membrane by cutting a minimum 5 foot x 5 foot grid pattern.

D. “Skin” existing membrane at substrate.

E. Remove existing membrane at fasteners.

F. Remove and replace wet, deteriorated or damaged roof insulation and decking as identified in moisture survey.

G. Remove abandoned equipment curbs, skylights, smoke hatches, and penetrations as indicated. Install decking to match existing as directed by Architect.

H. Raise, (disconnect by licensed craftsmen, if necessary) all HVAC units and other equipment supported by curbs to conform with the following:

1. Modify curbs as required to provide a minimum 8" base flashing height measured from the surface of the new membrane to the top of the flashing membrane.

2. Nail top of flashing and install new metal counterflashing prior to re-installation of unit. 3. Perimeter nailers must be elevated to match elevation of new roof insulation.

I. Immediately remove all debris from roof surface. Demolished roof system may not be stored on the roof surface.

J. Prime existing cap sheet to prepare for recover application.

K. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installation of roof system components so insulation and cover board is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installation of roof insulation and cover board.

C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.

D. Install insulation boards with long joints in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) with like material.

E. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall thickness is 4” or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction.


F. Trim surface of insulation boards where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water.

G. Install tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces.

H. Preliminarily Fastened Insulation for Mechanically Fastened Systems: Install insulation with fasteners at rate required by roofing system manufacturer or applicable authority, whichever is more stringent.

I. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and cover board and adhere to substrate as follows:

1. Install each layer in a two-part urethane adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer’s instruction.

J. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.5 COVER BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so cover board is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. Comply with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof cover board.

C. Install cover board with long joints of cover board in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) with cover board.

1. Cut and fit cover board within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers, projections, and penetrations.

D. Trim surface of cover board where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water.

1. Install tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces.

E. Preliminarily Fastened Insulation for Mechanically Fastened Systems: Install insulation with fasteners at rate required by roofing system manufacturer or applicable authority, which ever is more stringent.

F. Adhered Cover Board: Adhere cover board to substrate as follows:

1. Install in a two-part urethane adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer’s instruction.

G. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.6 ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install roofing membrane in accordance with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, applicable recommendations of the roofing manufacturer and requirements in this Section.

B. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.

C. Where roof slope exceeds 1/2 inch per 12 inches (1:24, contact the membrane manufacturer for installation instructions regarding installation direction and backnailing

D. Cooperate with testing and inspecting agencies engaged or required to perform services for installing roofing system.

E. Coordinate installing roofing system so insulation and other components of the roofing membrane system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is imminent.


1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing membrane sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing cement or hot roofing asphalt with joints and edges sealed.

2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system.

3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.7 BALLASTED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing.

B. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical representative.

C. Accurately align roofing membranes, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

D. Mechanically fasten or adhere perimeter of roofing membrane according to requirements in ANSI/SPRI RP-4 and according to roofing system manufacturer’s instructions.

E. Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of deck where possible.

F. Adhesive Seam Installation: Clean both faces of splice areas, apply splicing cement, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roofing membranes according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing membrane terminations.

1. Apply a continuous bead of in-seam sealant before closing splice if required by membrane roofing system manufacturer.

G. Tape Seam Installation: Clean and prime both faces of splice areas, apply splice tape, and firmly roll side and end laps of overlapping roofing membranes according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. Apply lap sealant and seal exposed edges of roofing membrane terminations.

H. Leave seams uncovered until inspected by membrane roofing system manufacturer.

I. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not meet requirements.

J. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing membrane in place with clamping ring.

K. Install roofing membrane and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing.

L. Adhere epichlorohydrin sheet over roofing membrane at locations indicated.

M. Install concrete pavers over roofing membrane.

N. Aggregate Ballast: Respread existing aggregate ballast uniformly over roofing membrane at the rate required by membrane roofing system manufacturer, spreading with care to minimize possibility of damage to membrane roofing system. Lay ballast as roofing membrane is installed, leaving roofing membrane ballasted at the end of the workday.

O. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.8 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates in accordance with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply solvent-based bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing.


C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with sheet flashing.

D. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing.

E. Clean seam areas and overlap and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.

F. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars.

G. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.9 WALKWAY INSTALLATION

A. Roof-Paver Walkways: Install walkway roof pavers according to manufacturer's written instructions in locations indicated, to form walkways. Leave 3 inches (75 mm) of space between adjacent roof pavers.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.

B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's Registered Roof Observer (RRO) to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect.

C. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

3.11 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

B. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

END OF SECTION


07 6200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

Page 1 of 2

SECTION 07 6200

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings and counter flashings


A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers.


A. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.

B. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2010.

C. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2010.

D. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007 (Reapproved 2012) e1.

E. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2012.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details.


A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with 3 years of documented experience.


A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.

B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SHEET MATERIALS

B. Pre-Finished Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M); 0.020 inch thick (24 gage); plain finish shop pre-coated with fluoropolymer coating.

1. Fluoropolymer Coating: High Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2604; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system.

a. Color: PPG UC105738 Duranar Malt

b. Color: Match medium bronze anodized storefront and windows

07 6200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 2 of 2

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: stainless steel and color coated to match flashing, with soft neoprene washers.

B. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd.

C. Sealant: Types as specified in Section 07 9005.

D. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.

B. Fabricate cleats of same material as cover.

C. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.

D. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.

E. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.

F. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant.

G. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners as possible.

B. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles.

C. Seal metal joints watertight.

END OF SECTION


07 9005 - CAULKING AND SEALING

Page 1 of 4

SECTION 07 9005

CAULKING AND SEALING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Sealants and joint backing.



B. Section 02750 - Rigid Pavement: Sealants required in conjunction with paving.

C. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories.


A. ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2010.

B. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.

C. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.

D. ASTM D1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Foam (Closed-Cell); 2005 (Reapproved 2011).

E. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Project Coordination, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, color availability, and proposed locations for use.

C. Manufacturer's color chart/samples

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.


A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation.

1.07 WARRANTY


B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.

07 9005 - CAULKING AND SEALING Page 2 of 4

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SEALANTS

A. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168.

B. General Purpose Exterior Sealant:

1. High performance hybrid sealant.

a. ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, M, A, and O

b. Type II, Class A, non-sagging

c. USDA compliant

d. Paintable

e. 50% movement capability

2. Color: to match adjacent material, as selected by Architect from manufacturers full range of colors

3. Manufacturer

a. BASF; MasterSeal NP 100

b. Tremco; Dymonic FC


4. Applications; use for the following:

a. Joints between concrete and other materials.

b. Joints between metal frames and other materials.

c. Joints between door and window frames and other materials

d. Joints between wood siding and metal

C. Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning, noncuring.

1. Applications: Use for:

a. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work.

b. Concealed sealant bead in metal siding overlaps.

c. Concealed sealant bead between cement board panel and metal trim

2. Products:

a. Tremco; "Butyl Sealant".

b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

D. General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade NF single component, paintable.

1. Color: to approximate adjacent colors. To be painted.

2. Applications; Use for:

a. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces.

b. Interior locations as required to improve appearances

c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.

3. Products:


a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 + Silicone Acrylic Latex Caulking Compound: www.pecora.com.

b. Tremco Global Sealants; Tremflex 834: www.tremcosealants.com.


E. Wet Interior Locations: silicone; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Use NT, G, A, and O; single component, mildew resistant.

1. Low VOC, complying with South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168.

2. With fungicide

3. Colors; to match adjacent surfaces, as selected by architect from manufacturer's clear, white, and standard colors


a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor, wall, and counter surfaces.

b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces.

5. Products:

a. Tremco Global Sealants; Tremsil 200: www.tremcosealants.com.


F. Interior Floor Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, semi self-leveling; ASTM C920, Type M,Grade P, Class 35, Uses T, M O, I, and A; multi- component.

1. Color: concrete gray and dark gray.


a. Expansion and control joints in floors.

3. Products:

a. Tremco; Vulkem 445SSL.


2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.

C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.

D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.

B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.

B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.

D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions.

B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.

C. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific dimensions are indicated.

D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.

E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.

F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

G. Tool joints concave.

H. At interior joints, install sealant after painting is completed. Color of sealant to match adjacent materials. Verify color with Architect.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect sealants until cured.

END OF SECTION


08 1113 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

Page 1 of 3

SECTION 08 1113

STEEL FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Non-fire-rated steel frames.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS


B. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.

C. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Field painting interior doors and frames.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 1998.

B. ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003.

C. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1998.

D. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2004a.

E. DHI A115 Series - Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware; Door and Hardware Institute; 2000 (ANSI/DHI A115 Series).

F. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 1999.

G. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association; 1999.

H. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

I. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 1998.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Project Coordination for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced grade standard.

C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any.


A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840.

B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.

08 1113 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES Page 2 of 3

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Steel Frames:

1. Assa Abloy Ceco, Curries, or Fleming: www.assaabloydss.com.

2. Steelcraft: www.steelcraft.com.

3. Republic

4. Kewanee Corporation

5. As approved by the Architect.


2.02 FRAMES

A. Requirements for All Frames:

1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1.

2. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with DHI A115 Series, with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard.

3. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.

2.03 STEEL FRAMES

A. General:

1. All frames to be full-profile welded, grind smooth, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush and invisible

2. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted.

3. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inches high to fill opening without cutting masonry units.

4. Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top.

B. Interior Door Frames: Full profile welded, grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.

1. 16 gauge.

2. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with A60/ZF180 coating.

3. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled.

4. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.

2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout of maximum 4-inch slump for hand troweling; thinner pumpable grout and gypsum grout is prohibited.

B. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.

C. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames.

08 1113 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES Page 3 of 3

2.05 FINISH MATERIALS

A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.

B. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior to installation.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA 840.

B. Coordinate mortar box and conduit requirements in frame at doors indicated for "Security".

C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. Utilize masonry anchors in masonry construction. Countersink anchors; fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed surfaces.

D. Grout frames all frames, including sidelights, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames or adjacent wall construction. Install all rubber door silencers prior to grouting.

E. Coordinate installation of hardware.

F. Coordinate installation of glazing.

G. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items.

H. Cut ends of glazing stops and other materials shall be primed and painted.

3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8.

B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.

3.06 SCHEDULE

A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on drawings.

END OF SECTION


08 1416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

Page 1 of 4

SECTION 08 1416

FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; fire rated and non-rated.



B. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry.

C. Section 08100 - Hollow Metal Work.

D. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.

E. Section 08850 - Glazing.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2006, 8th Ed., Version 2.0.

B. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; 2015.

C. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.

D. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association; 1999.

E. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Project Coordination for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics.

C. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required, special beveling, special blocking for hardware, factory machining criteria, factory finishing criteria, identify cutouts for glazing and louvers.

D. Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating wood grain, stain color, and sheen.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.

F. Warranty, executed in Owner's name.


A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.

B. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.

B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.

08 1416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 2 of 4

C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.


A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements.

B. Provide warranty for the following term:

1. Interior Doors: Life of installation.

C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: The following manufacturers will be acceptable based on compliance with specifications.

1. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com.

2. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc: www.marshfielddoors.com.

3. Graham Manufacturing Corporation


2.02 DOORS

A. All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements.

1. Quality Standard: AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Section 1300, Custom Grade.

2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated.

B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction.

1. Provide solid core doors at all locations.

2. Wood veneer facing with factory stain and transparent finish.

2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES

A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and faces as indicated above.

1. Formaldahyde free

2.04 DOOR FACINGS

A. Wood Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: Select White Birch, veneer grade as specified by quality standard, plain sliced, book veneer, center balance assembly match; unless otherwise indicated.

1. Vertical Edges: Compatible hardwood.

2. Exposed Top Edges: Compatible hardwood.

2. Pairs: Pair match each pair; set match pairs within 10 feet of each other when doors are closed.

B. Facing Adhesive: Type II - water resistant.


2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Glazing Stops: Wood, of same species as door facing, mitered corners, flush to face of door, 5/8" height; prepared for countersink style screws.

B. Astragals for non-rated double doors: inset double nylon brush at center of each door edge.

2.06 DOOR CONSTRUCTION

A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.

B. Cores Constructed with Stiles and Rails:

C. Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware reinforcement.

1. Provide solid blocking for other through bolted hardware.

D. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing.

E. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions.

F. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard.

G. Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWI Quality Standards Illustrated Section 1700.

2.07 FACTORY FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORS

A. Factory finish doors in accordance with specified quality standard:

1. Stain;

a. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of manufacturer’s colors

2. Transparent Finish: Transparent catalyzed polyurethane, Premium quality, dull satin sheen.

B. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.

1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements.

B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door.

C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.

D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.

E. Coordinate installation of glazing.

F. Install door louvers plumb and level.

3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.

B. Conform to specified quality standard for maximum diagonal distortion.


3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.

B. Adjust closers for full closure.

3.05 SCHEDULE

A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule appended to Section Appendix.

END OF SECTION


08 3100 - ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

Page 1 of 3

SECTION 08 3100

ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Wall access door and frame units.

B. Ceiling access door and frame units.



A. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.

B. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of all access door units.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of all access units.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCESS DOOR AND PANEL APPLICATIONS

A. Walls, Unless Otherwise Indicated:

1. Material: Steel, hot-dipped zinc or zinc-aluminum-alloy coated.

2. Size: 12 x 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Standard duty, hinged door.

4. Tool-operated spring or cam lock; no handle.

5. In All Wall Types: Surface mounted face frame and door surface flush with frame surface.

6. In Gypsum Board: Drywall bead frame with door surface flush with wall surface.

B. Walls in Wet Areas:


2. Size: 12 x 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated.



5. In All Wall Types: Surface mounted face frame and door surface flush with frame surface.

6. In Gypsum Board: Drywall bead frame with door surface flush with wall surface.

7. In Masonry: Surface mounted frame with door surface flush with frame surface.

C. Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated: Same type as for walls.


08 3100 - ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS Page 2 of 3

2. Size in Lay-in Grid Ceilings: To match grid module.

3. Size in Other Ceilings: 12 x 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated.



2.02 WALL AND CEILING UNITS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Acudor Products Inc: www.acudor.com.

2. Cendrex, Inc: www.cendrex.com.

3. Karp Associates, Inc; www.karpinc.com.

4. Milcor by Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc; www.milcorinc.com.


B. Access Doors: Factory fabricated door and frame units, fully assembled units with corner joints welded, filled, and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with assemblies units are to be installed in.

1. Door Style: Single thickness with rolled or turned in edges.

2. Frames: 16 gage, 0.0598 inch, minimum.

3. Heavy Duty Frames: 14 gage, 0.0747 inch, minimum.

4. Single Thickness Steel Door Panels: 0.070 inch, minimum.

5. Heavy Duty Single Thickness Steel Door Panels: 14 gage, 0.0747 inch, minimum.

6. Double-Skinned Hollow Steel Door Panels: 16 gage, 0.059 inch, minimum, on both sides and all edges.

7. Door Panels to Receive Wall/Ceiling Finish: Surface recessed 0.625 inch back from wall face.

8. Insulation: Non-combustible mineral or glass fiber.

9. Steel Finish: Primed.

10. Primed Finish: Polyester powder coat; manufacturer's standard color.

11. Size(s): As indicated.

12. Hardware:

a. Hardware for Fire Rated Units: As required for listing.

b. Hinges for Non-Fire-Rated Units: Concealed, constant force closure spring type.

c. Handle: Fixed.

d. Latch/Lock: Screw driver slot for quarter turn cam latch.

e. Latch/Lock: Tamperproof tool-operated cam latch.

f. Latch/Lock: Cylinder lock operated cam latch, two keys for each unit.

1) Mortise cylinder and core specified in Section 08 7100.

g. Number of Locks/Latches Required: As recommended by the manufacturer for the size of the unit.

h. Inside Latch Release: Mechanism that allows the panel to be opened from the inside.

i. Gasketing: Extruded neoprene, around the perimeter of the door panel.

08 3100 - ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS Page 3 of 3

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place.

C. Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access.

END OF SECTION


08 3313 - COILING COUNTER DOORS

Page 1 of 4

SECTION 08 3313

COILING COUNTER DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Coiling counter doors and operating hardware.

B. Electric motor operation; wiring from electric circuit disconnect to operator to control station.



B. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Cylinder cores and keys.


A. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.

B. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2006.

C. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association; 2007.

D. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

E. UL (EAUED) - Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

F. NFPA 105 - Standard for the Installation of Smoke-Control Door Assemblies, 2003 Edition

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard literature showing materials and details of construction and finish. Include data on electrical operation.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate rough and actual opening dimensions, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and installation details.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Indicate modes of operation, lubrication requirements and frequency, and periodic adjustments required.

E. Project Record Documents: Include as-built electrical diagrams for electrical operation and connection to fire alarm system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Coiling Counter Doors:

1. CHI Overhead Doors:

a. Non-Fire Rated: Series 6500.

2. The Cookson Company:

a. Non-Fire Rated: Series CD-10.

3. Cornell Iron Works Inc.:

a. Non-Fire Rated: Model ESC10.

4. McKeon Door Company:

08 3313 - COILING COUNTER DOORS Page 2 of 4

a. Non-Fire Rated: Model CS 3000 Series.

5. Overhead Door Corp.:

a. Non-Fire Rated: Series 651/657.


2.02 COILING COUNTER DOORS

A. Coiling Counter Doors, Non-Rated: Stainless steel slat curtain.

1. Cornell Iron, Model ESC10, or equal

2. Mounting: Between jamb.

3. Operation:

a. Concealed tubular motor operation

b. Tube Motor Shaft Assembly

1. Barrel: Steel pipe capable of supporting curtain load with maximum deflection of 0.03 inches per foot (2.5 mm per meter) of width.

4. Curtain:

a. Interlocked, flat faced slats, 1-1/2" high x 1/2" deep.

b. Slats; ASTM A 666, Type 304 series stainless steel, min. 22 ga.

c. Finish: No. 4

d. Fabricate continuous interlocking slat sections with high strength galvanized steel endlocks riveted to slats per UL requirements.

e. Stainless steel bottom bar reinforcing member with vinyl astragal, no. 4 finish.

5. Guides: Formed track; min. 12 ga, stainless steel, No. 4 finish.

6. Hood and mechanism covers: Manufacturer's standard, stainless steel, No. 4 finish.

7. Counterbalance Shaft Assembly:

a. Barrel; steel pipe capable of supporting curtain load with maximum deflection of 0.03" per foot of width.

b. Spring Balance; Oile-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion spring assembly designed for proper balance of door to ensure that maximum effort to operate will not exceed 25 lbs.

8. Brackets:

a. Fabricate from reinforced steel plate with permanently lubricated ball or roller bearings at rotating support points to support counterbalance shaft assembly and form end enclosures.

b. Finish; Phosphate treatment followed by a corrosion inhibitive baked-on zinc-rich gray polyester powder coat, min 2.5 mils.

9. Operator Cover; provide 24 ga stainless steel sheet metal cover to enclose exposed moving operating components at coil area of unit, No. 4 finish.

10. Provide keyed lock at interior side of bottom bar. Cylinder for lock to be provided under 08710 - Finish Hardware.

11. Countertop: By Food Service equipment supplier.


2.03 ELECTRIC OPERATION

A. Electrically Operated Doors: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

B. Electric Operators:

1. Mounting: Center mounted.

2. Motor Enclosure: NEMA MG 1.

3. Motor Rating: As recommended by manufacturer; continuous duty.

4. Motor Voltage: 24 volt, single phase, 60 Hz.

5. Opening Speed: 6 inches per second.

6. Manual override in case of power failure.

C. Control Station: Standard three button (OPEN-STOP-CLOSE) momentary control for each operator.

1. 24 volt circuit.

2. Recessed.

3. 1 control per door

D. Safety Edge: Located at bottom of curtain, full width, electro-mechanical sensitized type, wired to stop operator upon striking object, hollow neoprene covered.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that opening sizes, tolerances and conditions are acceptable.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress.

E. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure to CMU walls and/or structural frame.

F. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb, to provide smooth operation.

G. Coordinate installation of electrical service with Section 26 2717.

H. Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components.

I. Complete wiring from fire alarm system.

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.

B. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/16 inch.

C. Maximum Variation From Level: 1/16 inch.

D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch per 10 ft straight edge.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean installed components.


B. Remove labels and visible markings.

END OF SECTION


08 4800 - ALUMINUM DOORS AND STOREFRONT

Page 1 of 6

SECTION 08 4100

ALUMINUM DOORS AND STOREFRONT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Aluminum-framed storefront

B. Aluminum doors.

C. Aluminum door hardware.


A. Section 07900 - Caulking and Sealing: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.

B. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories.


A. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to Site; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2004.

B. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1998.

C. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2009.

D. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil Engineers; 2010.

E. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2008.

F. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2007.

G. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004.

H. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2002 (Reapproved 2010).

I. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009).

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural: Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load.

1. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of 2015 IBC code. 105 MPH, 3 second gust.

2. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to L/175 of the clear span or flexure limit of glass in any direction, with full recovery of glazing materials.

3. Deflection under design load shall not exceed L/175 for spans less than 162"


Page 2 of 6

4. Deflection under design load shall not exceed L/240 for spans greater than 162"

B. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals.

C. Thermal Transmittance: Conductive thermal transmittance shall not be more than 0.43 BTU/hr.sq ft. F in accordance with ASTM 1503.1, when glazed with 1" insulated glass.

D. Air Infiltration:

1. Doors: measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E 283.

a. Single door; Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.50 cu ft./min/sq. ft. of unit.

b. Pair of doors; Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.10 cu ft./min/sq. ft. of unit.

2. Unit Framing: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft./min/sq. ft. of wall area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E 283.

E. Condensation Resistance Factor:

1. Measured in accordance with AAMA 1503.1.

2. Storefront Framing: not less than 57

3. Doors: not less than 40

F. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a test pressure difference of 12 lbf/sq. ft.

G. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system.

H. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements.

I. Sunshade must be designed to resist 105 MPH, 3 second gust wind speed Nominal, not ultimate wind speed

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, door hardware, internal drainage details.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required.

D. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, engineering calculations, and dimensional limitations.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified requirements.

F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.


Page 3 of 6


A. Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in Colorado.

B. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum three years of documented experience.

1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A. Convene one week before starting work of this section.


A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.

B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.


A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Correct defective Work within a 1 year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

C. Provide 1 year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Specifications are based upon the products of EFCO Corporation to define quality and performance requirements.

B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers, based upon compliance with plans and specifications include:

1. Kawneer North America: Trifab 451 and 451T www.kawneer.com.

2. United States Aluminum Corp: www.usalum.com.

3. Manko Window Systems: www.mankowindows.com

3. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

2.02 STOREFRONT

A. Exterior Aluminum Storefront:

1. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: EFCO 403-T or equal, thermally broken, factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage, and attachment devices.

a. Provide factory fabricated corners to match.

b. Finish:

1) Typical unless noted otherwise: Class I clear anodized.

2. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system.

a. Cross Section: 2" x 4 1/2" nominal


Page 4 of 6

b. All aluminum vertical and horizontal extrusions shall have a nominal wall thickness of 0.080"

c. Frame; Frame components shall be mechanically fastened by means of extruded aluminum shear blocks attached to vertical mullions.

d. Glazing stops: Flush.

e. Dry glazed with EPDM gasket.

f. Provide extruded aluminum head receptors at all exterior locations. Allow for 1inch of vertical movement. Color to match storefront.

g. Provide extruded aluminum sills. Color to match storefront.

B. Doors: Series D502, wide stile entrance door, Glazed aluminum, as manufactured by EFCO Corporation or equal.

1. Thickness: 2 inches.

2. .125" wall thickness

3. Top Rail: 5" inches wide.

4. Vertical Stiles: 5" inches wide.

5. Bottom Rail: 10" inches wide.

6. Glazing Stops: Square.

7. Corners shall have heavy concealed reinforcement brackets shall be secured with screws and shall be of deep penetration and fillet welded.

8. Closer Reinforcement: concealed reinforcement at door frame and door face at closer.

9. Door stops shall include a bulb weather-strip that complies with ASTM E 2203 specification

10. Finish: Class I clear anodized, to match storefront.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).

B. Fasteners: Stainless steel.

C. Exposed Flashings: 0.032 inch thick aluminum sheet; finish to match framing members.

D. Perimeter Sealant: Type as specified in Section 07900.

E. Glass: As specified in Section 08850.

1. Glass in Exterior Framing: 1" insulated, tempered as required by code.

2. Glass in Doors: Interior and exterior doors 1" insulated, tempered.

F. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements.

2.05 FINISHES

A. Class I Clear Anodized Finish: AA-M10C22A41, AAMA 611, Architectural Class I Clear Anodic Coating

2.06 HARDWARE

A. Door Hardware:

1. Refer to Section 08710 - Finish Hardware and Hardware Schedule for additional hardware description and requirements.


Page 5 of 6

2. Hinges:

a. Continuous aluminum hinge, anodized finish to match door color.

3. Weatherstripping; Provide for all doors.

a. Sill sweep; Adjustable molded EPDM or vinyl sweep, continuously contacting threshold

b. Stops; bulb weatherstrip that complies with ASTM E 2203

4. Threshold, extruded aluminum

5. Remaining hardware provided by others, refer to Section 08710 - Finish Hardware. Alum door provider shall coordinate operation and fit of remaining hardware to be provided for use on aluminum doors with Finish Hardware supplier

2.07 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.

B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.

C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.

D. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals with bituminous paint.

E. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.

F. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads.

G. Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.

1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in completed assemblies, including joint edges.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.

B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this section.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities.

C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.

D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.

E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.

F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam.

G. Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads to sill flashing.

H. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.

I. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier.


Page 6 of 6

J. Install glass in accordance with Section 08850, using interior dry glazing method.

K. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07900.

L. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft. non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft., whichever is less.

B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.

B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.

C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction.

B. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

END OF SECTION


08 7100 - DOOR HARDWARE

Page 1 of 9

SECTION 08 7100

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Hardware for wood and hollow metal doors.

B. Thresholds.

C. Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets.


A. Section 01 3305 - Administrative Requirements; Electronic Submittals Procedures

B. Section 08 1113 - Steel Doors and Frames.

C. Section 08 1416 – Flush Wood Doors

E. Section 08 4100 – Aluminum Storefront: Hardware for doors in storefront, including:

1. Integral weatherstripping.

2. Continuous Hinges.

3. Thresholds.


A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009.

B. BHMA A156.1 - American National Standard for Butts and Hinges; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA A156.1).

C. BHMA A156.2 - American National Standard for Bored and Preassembled Locks & Latches; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2011 (ANSI/BHMA A156.2).

D. BHMA A156.3 - American National Standard for Exit Devices; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2008 (ANSI/BHMA A156.3).

E. BHMA A156.4 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Closers; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2008 (ANSI/BHMA A156.4).

F. BHMA A156.7 - American National Standard for Template Hinge Dimensions; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2003 (ANSI/BHMA A156.7).

G. BHMA A156.8 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Overhead Stops and Holders; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.8).

H. BHMA A156.13 - American National Standard for Mortise Locks & Latches Series 1000; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2005 (ANSI/BHMA A156.13).

I. BHMA A156.15 - American National Standard for Release Devices - Closer Holder, Electromagnetic and Electromechanical; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2011 (ANSI/BHMA A156.15).

J. BHMA A156.18 - American National Standard for Materials and Finishes; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA A156.18).

K. BHMA A156.21 - American National Standard for Thresholds; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2009 (ANSI/BHMA A156.21).

L. BHMA A156.23 - American National Standard for Electromagnetic Locks; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.23).

08 7100 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 2 of 9

M. BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006.

N. BHMA A156.115W - Hardware Preparation in Wood Doors with Wood or Steel Frames; 2006.

O. DHI (LOCS) - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; Door and Hardware Institute; 2004.

P. DHI WDHS.3 - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood Doors; Door and Hardware Institute; 1993; also in WDHS-1/WDHS-5 Series, 1996.

Q. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013.

R. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.


A. Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products onto which door hardware will be installed.

B. Furnish templates for door and frame preparation to manufacturers and fabricators of products requiring internal reinforcement for door hardware.

C. Convey Owner's keying requirements to manufacturers.

D. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week prior to commencing work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.

E. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware, schedules, and catalog cuts.

2. Submit manufacturer's parts lists and templates.

C. Hardware Schedule: Detailed listing of each item of hardware to be installed on each door. Use door numbering scheme as included in the Contract Documents. Identify electrically operated items and include power requirements.

D. Keying Schedule: Submit for approval of Owner.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention.

F. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.

1. Submit manufacturer's parts lists.

G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.

B. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with 5 years of experience.

C. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) qualified person to assist in the work of this section.



A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule.

1.08 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware.

B. Furnish templates for door and frame preparation.

C. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner.

D. Coordinate Owner's keying requirements during the course of the Work.

1.09 WARRANTY


Provide the following special hardware warranty for the following items:

B. Continuous Hinges: 10 years.

C. Locksets: 5 years.

D. Door Closers: 10 years.

E. Automatic Operators: 2 years.

F. Exit devices: 3 years.

1.10 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS

A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component.

B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS - BASIS OF DESIGN

A. Component specifications reference manufacturers to indicate requirements and quality. Products of manufacturer's complying with plans and specifications may also be acceptable upon approval by Architect.


2.02 DOOR HARDWARE - GENERAL

A. Provide all hardware specified or required to make doors fully functional, compliant with applicable codes, and secure to the extent indicated.

B. Provide all items of a single type of the same model by the same manufacturer.

C. Provide products that comply with the following:

1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes.

2. ADA Standards for Accessible Design.

3. ANSI/ICC A117.1, American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.

4. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80.

5. All Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.


6. Hardware for Smoke and Draft Control Doors: Provide hardware that enables door assembly to comply with air leakage requirements of the applicable code.

D. Finishes: All door hardware the same finish unless otherwise indicated.

1. Finish: Satin chrome plated over nickel on brass or bronze, 626 (approx US26D).

2. Finish Definitions: BHMA A156.18.

3. Exceptions:

a. Where base metal is specified to be different, provide finish that is an appearance equivalent according to BHMA A156.18.

b. Hinges for Fire-Rated Doors: Steel base metal with plated finish.

c. Door Closer Covers and Arms: Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors; aluminum color

E. Fasteners:

1. Furnish necessary screws, bolts, nuts and fasteners as required to install hardware.

2. Provide fasteners and anchors with finish compatible to finish hardware and substrate.

3. Mineral Core Wood Doors: Sex bolts.

4. Concrete and Masonry Substrates: Stainless steel machine screws and lead expansion shields.

5. Provide stainless steel screws at stainless steel hinges.

2.03 HARDWARE

A. Available Manufacturers: subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Butts and Hinges:

a. Bommer Industries: BB5000, BB5004.

b. Hager Hinge: BB1279, BB1168.

c. McKinney Hinge: TA2714, T4B2786.

2. Continuous Hinges:

a. Markar Products, Inc.: FM300, FM311.

b. Stanley Hinge: 651, 656.

c. Hager Hinge: 790-900, 790-911.

4. Locksets, Latchsets and Deadbolts:

a. Schlage Lock: ND Series, Sparta (SPA) Lever Design.

b. Best Lock Systems: 9K Series

5. Exit/Panic Devices:

a. Von Duprin. 98 Series.

b. Stanley: Precision Hardware Exit Devices

6. Door Closers and Magnetic Holders:

a. LCN. 4111-EDA 4130-Series SEM-7800.

b. Stanley QDC 100 Series Grade 1 Extra Heavy Duty Closer

7. Automatic Operators:


a. LCN. 4840 (Door Mounted Series).

8. Flush Bolts, Automatic Flush Bolts, and Coordinators:

a. Ives FB31P FB41P FB257N FB358 COR-BX-FB.

b. Door Controls 842, 942, 780, 790, 600.

c. Rockwood 1842, 1942, 555, 557, 1600.

9. Door Trim Units:

a. Ives WS406, FS436, RB470.

b. Rockwood 407/408, 440/441, 455.

c. Triangle Brass W1274CCS, 1210, 1245.

10. Door Stripping, Seals and Threshold:

a. National Guard Products 896S, A626A, C627A, 2525B.

b. Pemko 2005 18041CP, 3452CP, S88D.

2.04 CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. Security keyed.

1. Schlage standard 6-pin conventional cylinder with "Everest 29" standard security key

B. Provide locksets and cylinders with levels of control as follows:

1. Master key locksets and cylinders in accordance with Owner's requirements and final keying schedule.

2. All keying and coordination shall be by hardware supplier. Coordinate Owner's keying requirements during course of the work. Upon return of reviewed finish hardware schedule, arrange a meeting between the Owner, Hardware Supplier, and other involved parties to establish a keying schedule based on Owner's project requirements.

3. Provide bitting list with set-up chart to Owner at Project Closeout.

4. Provide cylinder cores for locks provided in other sections as indicated in Hardware Groups, including the following. Contractor to provide any extensions or accessories required for proper installation.

a. Cylinder dogging for exit devices

5. Furnish keys and blanks as follows:

a. Provide 2 cut keys per lock

b. Provide an additional 5 keys to be cut as directed by Owner

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work; labeled, fire-rated doors and frames are present and properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.

B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct characteristics.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes.

B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.

C. Install hardware on fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80.


D. Install all finish hardware as required prior to painting and then remove and reinstall after painting is completed.

E. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item:

1. For steel doors and frames: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames."

2. For wood doors: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."


A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01 4000.

B. Hardware Supplier's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall field inspect and certify hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 7000.

B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 7000.

B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish.

3.06 HARDWARE SCHEDULE:

A. Hardware Schedule / Groups: HW SET: 01 ALUMINUM ENTRANCE – SINGLE DOOR EXTERIOR DOOR NUMBERS: 143A (ALTERNATE #1) EACH TO HAVE: 1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE DOOR MANUFACTURERS STANDARD 630 B/O 1 EA EXIT DEVICE CD-98NL-OP-SNB 626 VON 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-001 PATENTED (CYLINDER DOGGING) 626 SCH 1 EA IC RIM CYLINDER 20-057 PATENTED 626 SCH 1 EA PERMANENT CORE 20-740 PATENTED 626 SCH 1 EA CLOSER/STOP ARM 4111-AVB-EDA-CUSH-4110-18-4110-30/61-TB 689 LCN 1 EA THRESHOLD 2746X6AFG – 12” x 42” AL PEM 1 SET WEATHER STRIP MANUFACTURERS STANDARD AL B/O 1 EA DOOR BOTTOM MANUFACTURERS STANDARD AL B/O DOOR CLOSER REQUIRES 5-1/2 INCH TOP RAIL, MEASURED FROM THE STOP EXIT DEVICES REQUIRES 4-1/2 INCH SIDE RAIL. HW SET: 02 INTERIOR KITCHEN ACCESS DOOR NUMBERS: 142, 142A EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA BUTT HINGE BB1279 652 HAG 1 EA OFFICE LOCKSET D92PD SPARTA PATENTED 626 SCH 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 X CKS X .050 X 36" H 630 IVE


HW SET: 03 EXIT 50+ OCCUPANTS DOOR NUMBERS: 143 EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA BUTT HINGE BB1279 652 HAG 1 EA EXIT DEVICE 98-L-F-994L-SNB 626 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111-EDA-AVB-SPG CUSH-HO-TB 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 X CKS X .050 X 36" H 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 BRN IVE HW SET: 04 EXIT 50+ OCCUPANTS DOOR NUMBERS: 149, 228, 228A, 230, 230A, 231, 231A EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA BUTT HINGE BB1279 652 HAG 1 EA EXIT DEVICE 98-L-F-994L-SNB 626 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111-EDA-AVB-SPG CUSH-HO-TB 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 X CKS X .050 X 10" H 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 BRN IVE REUSE EXISTING HINGES AT DOORS 149. 230A, 231 HW SET: 05 DOUBLE DOOR ENTRY DOOR NUMBER: 141, 141A, 232 EACH TO HAVE: 6 EA BUTT HINGE BB1168 652 HAG 1 EA MULLION KR9954-154 689 VON 2 EA EXIT DEVICE 98-L-F-994L-SNB 626 VON 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-001 PATENTED (MULLION) 626 SCH 2 EA IC RIM CYLINDER 20-057 PATENTED 626 SCH 2 EA PERMANENT CORE 20-740 PATENTED 626 SCH 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111-EDA-AVB-TB 689 LCN 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 X CKS X .050 X 10" H 630 IVE 2 EA WALL STOP WS406 630 IVE 6 EA SILENCER SR64 BRN IVE


HW SET: 06 CLASSROOM ENTRY DOOR NUMBERS: 221, 222, 223, 224, 252 EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA BUTT HINGE BB1279 652 HAG 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70PD SPARTA PATENTED 626 SCH 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 X CKS X .050 X 10" H 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 BRN IVE HW SET: 07 CLASSROOMS OVER 1,000 SQ. FT/OVER 50+ STUDENTS DOOR NUMBER: 149, 228, 228A, 230, 230A, 231, 231A EACH TO HAVE: 1 EA BUTT HINGE BB1168 652 HAG 1 EA EXIT DEVICE 98-L-F-994L-SNB 626 VON 1 EA IC RIM CYLINDER 20-057 PATENTED 626 SCH 1 EA PERMANENT CORE 20-740 PATENTED 626 SCH 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 X CKS X .050 X 10" H 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 BRN IVE HW SET: 08 STORE ROOM – DOUBLE DOOR DOOR NUMBERS: 140, 227, 229 EACH TO HAVE: 6 EA BUTT HINGE BB1279 652 HAG 1 SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB41P 626 IVE 1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FB X BX 628 IVE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP-1 626 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70PD SPARTA PATENTED 626 SCH 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 X CKS X .050 X 10" H 630 IVE 2 EA OVERHEAD STOP 900S 630 GLY 2 EA ASTRAGAL 9605A (HEIGHT OF DOOR) 628 NGP 2 EA SILENCER SR64 BRN IVE HW SET: 09 CONFERENCE ROOM DOOR NUMBERS: 217, 218 EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA BUTT HINGE BB1279 652 HAG 1 EA OFFICE LOCK ND50PD SPARTA PATENTED 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS406 630 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 BRN IVE


HW SET: 10 TOILET ROOMS DOOR NUMBERS: 120, 121, 145, 147, 245, 247 EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA BUTT HINGE REUSE EXISTING 1 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 32D IVE 1 EA PULL W/ PLATE 8303-0 32D IVE 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 X CKS X .050 X 10" H 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS406 630 IVE HW SET: 11 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS DOOR NUMBERS: 142B, 142C EACH TO HAVE: 1 EA IC RIM/MORTISE CYL 20-057 OR 26-091 PATENTED 626 SCH 1 EA PERMANENT CORE 20-740 PATENTED 626 SCH COORDINATE CYLINDER TYPE WITH DOOR MANUFACTURER. COORDINATE INSTALLATION WITH DOOR MANUFACTURER. MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE 50 EA WALL STOP WS406 630 IVE 300 EA SILENCER SR66 BRN IVE

END OF SECTION


08 8000 - GLAZING

Page 1 of 4

SECTION 08 8000

GLAZING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Single pane glazing

B. Double pane glazing

C. Glazing compounds and accessories.



B. Section 08 1416 – Flush Wood Doors

C. Section 08 4100 – Aluminum Storefront

D. Section 08 5113 – Aluminum Windows

1.03 REFERENCES

A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition.

B. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2002.

C. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2001.

D. ASTM C 1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass; 2004.

E. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2005.

F. ASTM E 773 - Standard Test Method for Accelerated Weathering of Sealed Insulating Glass Units; 2001.

G. ASTM E 774 - Standard Specification for the Classification of the Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units; 1997.

H. ASTM E 1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings; 2004.

I. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2004.

J. GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 1990.

1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Select type and thickness of exterior glass to withstand dead loads and wind loads acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with 2009 IBC code.

1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E 1300 to determine glass type and thickness.

2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery of glazing materials.

3. Thicknesses listed are minimum.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements.

08 8000 - GLAZING Page 2 of 4


A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for glazing installation methods.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years documented experience.



1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.

B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Provide a ten (10) year warranty to include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GLASS MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Interpane

2. Cardinal Glass

3. Viracon

4. PPG Industries, Inc.

5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Clear Float Glass: Clear, heat strengthened.

1. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select).

2. Comply with ASTM C 1048.

3. Thickness as required for spans and loads, 1/4" minimum.

C. Safety Glass: Clear; fully tempered.

1. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select) and ASTM C 1048.

2. Comply with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II.

3. Thickness as required for spans and loads, 1/4" minimum.

4. Provide this type of glazing in the locations required by code.

a. Glazed lights in doors.

b. Glazed sidelights to doors.

c. Glazed borrow lights.


2.02 GLASS TYPES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Any of the manufacturers listed under Glass Materials.

B. (Type G1) Monolithic Glass Units: Single pane glazing

1. Provide at interior glass panels.

2. Clear float glass, thickness as required for loads and spans, 1/4" minimum

3. Tempered as required at non-fire rated hazardous locations as required by code.

a. Permanently label safety glazing

C. (Type G2) 1” Insulated Glass Units: Double pane glazing. PPG Solarban 60 clear

1. Outdoor Lite: PPG Clear with Solarban 60 Low-E coating on second surface, 6mm

2. Spacer: 1/2” aluminum

3. Indoor Lite: PPG Clear, 6mm

a. Visible Light Transmission: 70%

b. U-Value Winter: 0.29

c. U-Value Summer: 0.27

d. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): 0.39

e. Shading Coefficient: 0.45

f. Outdoor Visible Light Reflectance: 11%

4. Tempered as required at locations as required by code.

a. Permanently label safety glazing

2.03 GLAZING COMPOUNDS

A. Butyl Sealant: Single component; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; Shore A hardness of 10 to 20; black color; non-skinning.

B. Silicone Sealant: Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; clear.

2.04 GLAZING ACCESSORIES

A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option II. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.

1. Clear silicone blocks at structural silicone glaze units

B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option II. Minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self-adhesive on one face.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.

B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.

B. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.

C. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C 1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual.

D. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.03 INSTALLATION-STRUCTURAL SILICONE

A. Set glazing plumb and level with shims.

B. Silicone glaze perimeter. Tool smooth.

C. Allow to set and Silicone glaze opposite side.

D. Remove shims and fill

E. Silicone glazing to be flush to face of glass with concave finish.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.

B. Remove labels after Work is complete.

C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.

3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units.

3.06 FILM SCHEDULE

A. Refer to window schedule on drawings for locations and layout.

END OF SECTION


09 2116 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

Page 1 of 6

SECTION 09 2116

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Ceiling suspension system for gypsum board ceilings

B. Gypsum wallboard.

C. Joint treatment and accessories.


A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Building framing.

B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.

C. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Acoustic insulation, vapor retarder.

D. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Water-resistive barrier over sheathing.

E. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Acoustic sealant.


A. AISI SG02-1 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; American Iron and Steel Institute; 2001 with 2004 supplement. (replaced SG-971)

B. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board; 2012.

C. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.

D. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2007 (Reapproved 2013).

E. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base; 2010a.

F. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2013.

G. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012.

H. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2013.

I. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; Gypsum Association; 2012.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing and acoustic seals.

C. Product Data: Provide data on gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system.


A. Perform in accordance with ASTM C 840. Comply with requirements of GA-600 for fire-rated assemblies.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and finishing, with minimum 5 years of documented experience.

09 2116 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Page 2 of 6

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.

1. Refer to wall types on drawings for additional requirements.

2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Gypsum Board Ceiling Suspension Systems - Commercial quality, cold-rolled steel, hot dipped galvanized finish.

1. Specifications are based upon the products of USG. Products of alternate manufacturers, complying with specifications and drawings may be acceptable, including

a. Armstrong

b. As approved by the Architect

2. Main Tees: Fire-Rated Heavy Duty classification 1.617” high x 144” long, integral reversible splice with knurled face. (DGL-26 15/16” Face and 1-1/2” high)

3. Cross Members: Fire-Rated members with knurled face. Cross Tees: DGLW-424 cross tee1-1/2” high x 48” long with 1-1/2” wide face; quick release cross tee ends for positive locking and removability without tools

4. Accessory Cross Tees: Cross tees must have knurled faces and quick release cross tee ends for positive locking and removability without tools.

5. Wall Moldings: Single web with knurled face

6. Accessories

a. Splice Clip DGSC-180

b. Compression Posts

7. Wire: Hanger Wire (12 ga.), galvanized

2.03 BOARD MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:

1. American Gypsum: www.americangypsum.com.

2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com.

3. Lafarge North America Inc: www.lafargenorthamerica.com.

4. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com.

5. USG Corporation: www.usg.com.


B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.

1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.

a. Mold-resistant board is required at all locations.

3. Core Type: At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating, use type required by indicated tested assembly.

4. Edges: Tapered

5. Thickness: 5/8”


C. Ceiling Board: Special sag-resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.

1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Core: Regular and fire resistance rated of type indicated in referenced assemblies.

3. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

4. Edges: Tapered.

5. Products:

a. American Gypsum; Interior Ceiling Board.

b. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Interior Ceiling.

c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock CD Ceiling Board.

d. National Gypsum Company; High Strength Brand Ceiling Board.

D. Water-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M

1. Application: Gypsum board within 6'-0" of a water source. All toilet room walls.

2. Mold Resistance: Score of 0 in accordance with ASTM G21

3. Mold Resistance: Score of 10 in accordance with ASTM D3273

4. Water Absorbtion: less than 5% after 2 hr immersion per ASTM C473.

5. Core Type: Regular, Type X, and Type C, as indicated in assemblies.


7. Edges: Tapered.

8. Provide green or colored paper surface.

E. Impact-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396 and C1629; ends square cut.

1. Application: Lower 4’-0” of all Hallway/Corridor walls.

2. Mold Resistance: Score of 0 in accordance with ASTM G21

3. Mold Resistance: Score of 10 in accordance with ASTM D3273

4. Water Absorbtion: less than 5% after 2 hr immersion per ASTM C473.

5. Core Type: Fire-resistance rated gypsum core, with additives to enhance surface indentation resistance and impact resistance.

6. Surface paper: Abrasion resistant, 100 percent recycled content moisture/mold/mildew resistant paper on front, back and long edges.

7. Surface Abrasion Resistance: Classification Level 3 in accordance with ASTM C 1629

8. Indentation Resistance: Classification Level 1 in accordance with ASTM C 1629.

9. Soft Body Impact Resistance: Classification Level 2 in accordance with ASTM C 1629

10. Hard Body Impact Resistance: Classification Level 1 in accordance with ASTM C 1629.


12. Edges: Tapered.

13. Provide purple or colored paper surface.


2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Acoustic Insulation: As specified in Section 07 2100.

B. Acoustic Sealant: As specified in Section 07 9005.

C. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance.

2. Square edge control joint, and casing bead at exposed panel edges.

3. Square edge corner bead at exposed panel edges.

D. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions.

1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise indicated.

2. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.

E. High Build Drywall Surfacer: Vinyl acrylic latex-based coating for spray application, designed to take the place of skim coating and separate paint primer in achieving Level 4 finish.

F. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch In Thickness, to Wood Members, and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for exterior locations.

G. Fasteners: Type W Bugle Head screws

H. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place.

I. Single Tee Adapter Clips: Armstrong Single Tee Adapter Clips (STAC) for all staggered grid locations.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION/PREPARATION

A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.

B. Check framing for proper spacing and alignment & verify that spacing of framing members does not exceed spacing allowable for wallboard to be used. Notify contractor of any deficiencies.

C. Defective framing must be corrected before starting application of drywall.

D. Maintain temperature above 50 degrees F. during installation.

E. Provide ventilation during and following adhesive joint treatment applications.

3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as permitted by standard.

B. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/600.

1. Laterally brace entire suspension system.

C. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less than double studs at jambs.

D. Blocking: Install wood blocking for support of:

1. Framed openings.

2. Wall mounted cabinets.


3. Plumbing fixtures.

4. Toilet accessories.

5. Wall mounted door hardware.

3.03 SUSPENDED DRYWALL CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Hanger Wire Installation: Secure hanger wires to upper structural elements and space hangers so that each hanger wire supports a maximum of 16 sq. ft.

B. Space main tee members a maximum span of 48” on center and/or as specified by the UL Fire Resistance Directory.

C. Space cross tees recommended 16” o.c. for ½” gypsum board and at 24” o.c. for 5/8” gypsum board. Install extra cross tees where butt joints occur, 8” from each side of the butt joint

D. Install compression struts per manufacturer's specifications and spacing, in accordance with wind load applicable. Adjust main and cross tee spacing as necessary for loading conditions.

E. Attach gypsum board to the suspension system main runners, cross tees, and cross channels with 1-1/4” bugle head screws, single layer of board spaced 16” o.c. in the field and at the perimeter of the panels, locate 3/8” in from panel edges. Hold panels in firm contact with framing while driving fasteners.

3.04 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION

A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.

B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing members.

2. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board.

3. In non-fire-rated construction, seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and rough-in boxes.

3.05 BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations.

B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing.

1. Exception: Tapered edges to receive joint treatment at right angles to framing.

C. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of assembly listing.

D. Installation on Wood Framing: For rated assemblies, comply with requirements of listing authority. For non-rated assemblies, install as follows:

1. Single-Layer Applications: Screw attachment.

2. Double-Layer Application: Install base layer using screws. Install face layer using screws.

E. Moisture Protection: Treat cut edges and holes in moisture resistant gypsum board with sealant.

F. Control joints to be per manufacturer's recommendation and architect's site direction. Minimum requirements shall include control joints at:

1. Above door in public/corridor areas


2. Ceiling areas greater than 200 square feet

3. Soffits controlled at all inside and outside corners.

G. Fire rated walls shall be constructed with continuous gypsum board layers. Non-rated walls should butt to rated walls.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated.

1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long.

2. At each side above door openings.

B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.

C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated.

3.07 JOINT TREATMENT

A. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use fiberglass joint tape, bedded with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound and finished with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.

B. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:

1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Typical exposed walls and ceilings

2. Level 1: Gypsum wall and ceiling areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed construction.

3. Level 0: Temporary partitions and surfaces indicated to be finished in later stage of project.

C. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes.

1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.

D. Gypsum Board walls and ceilings to have smooth finish.

3.08 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.

3.09 INSPECTION

A. Review finish of all wall areas with General and Painting Contractor for acceptability.

B. Repair areas as required and have re-reviewed

END OF SECTION


09 3000 - TILING

Page 1 of 5

SECTION 09 3000

TILING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Tile for floor applications.

B. Tile for wall applications.

C. Ceramic accessories.



B. Section 04810 - Masonry Assemblies


A. ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series/A136.1 - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium); 2005.

1. ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2005.

2. ANSI A108.1b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (R2005).

3. ANSI A108.1c - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (R2005).

4. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 1999 (R2005).

5. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (R2005).

6. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 1999 (R2005).

7. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 1999 (R2005).

8. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 1999 (R2005).

9. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework; 1999 (R2005).

10. ANSI A118.3 - American National Standard Specifications for Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile Setting and -Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 1999 (R2005).

11. ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile; 2008.

B. TCA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation; Tile Council of North America, Inc.; 2007/2008.

09 3000 - TILING Page 2 of 5


A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, and junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, and setting details.

D. Samples: 2 samples of manufacturer's range of color selections, and 2 samples of tile material of selected tile colors.


A. Maintain one copy of TCA Handbook and ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series on site.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5 years of documented experience.




A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


A. Do not install adhesives in an unventilated environment.

B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide 3 % full size units of each size, color, and surface finish of tile specified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 TILE

A. Manufacturers: All products of each type by the same manufacturer.

1. Daltile Corporation

2. American Olean

3. Summitville Tiles, Inc

4. As approved by the Architect.


B. Porcelain Tile Type T-1: Fidenza #FD02 Dorado wall field tile as manufactured by Daltile or approved equivalent product and as follows:

1. Glazed porcelain

2. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent.

3. Dynamic C.O.F.: >0.42 wet

4. Size and Shape: 12" x 12" field tile, 6” x 12” base and 3” x 12” bullnose trim


5. Edges: Cushioned.

6. Surface Finish: Unpolished.

C. Porcelain Tile Type T-2: Fidenza #FD03 Dorado floor field tile as manufactured by Daltile or approved equivalent product and as follows:

1. Glazed porcelain

2. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent.


4. Size and Shape: 12" x 12" field tile



D. Natural Stone Accent Tile Type T-3: Natural Stone Collection #SA50 Kinetic Khaki Blend wall accent tile as manufactured by Daltile or approved equivalent product and as follows:

1. Natural stone tile

2. Size and Shape: 3" x 12".



E. Quarry Tile Type T-4: Quarry Textures #0T01 Diablo Red floor and cove base tile as manufactured by Daltile or approved equivalent product and as follows:

1. Unglazed quarry tile

2. Moisture Absorption: < 3.0% percent (ASTM C373)


4. Size and Shape: 6" x 6" field tile, 5” x 6” cove base and cove base corner trim as required.


6. Surface Finish: Unglazed

2.02 ADHESIVE MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers:

1. W.R. Bonsal Co.

2. Bostik, Inc.

3. Laticrete

4. Mapei Corporation.


B. Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3, Latapoxy 300, thinset bond type.

2.03 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers:

1. W.R. Bonsal Co.

2. Bostik, Inc.

3. Laticrete.

4. Mapei Corporation



B. Thin-set Mortar; Laticrete 254, Platinum Multipurpose Thin-set Mortar as manufactured by Laticrete or equal.

1. Polymer fortified latex-portland cement.

2. In accordance with ANSI A118.4

3. Antimicrobial protection

4. 10 year warranty

2.04 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Laticrete International, Inc: www.laticrete.com

2. Bonsal American, Inc: www.sakrete.com

3. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.

4. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com.


B. Standard Grout (Type 1):

1. Laticrete SpectraLOCK PRO epoxy grout, as manufactured by Laticrete or equal.

2. Polymer modified cement grout, sanded, meeting performance requirements of ANSI A118.3, epoxy grout.

3. Antimicrobial product protection to inhibit growth of mold and mildew.

4. Stain resistant.

5. Color: as indicated in Finish Legend

2.06 THIN-SET ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Sealant: Neutral cure silicone sealant, in accordance with ASTM C-920 and ASTM C-794

1. Laticrete Latasil Tile and Stone Sealant

2. 25% movement capabilities.

3. Color; to match grout colors

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile.

B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.

C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of setting materials to sub-floor surfaces.

D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer.

E. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protect surrounding work from damage.

B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.

C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances.

D. Install cementitious backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of dry-set mortar to a feather edge.


A. Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and The Tile Council of North America Handbook recommendations.

B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.

C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor joints.

D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout.

E. Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

F. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.

G. Keep control joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints.

H. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.

I. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated.

J. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes.

3.04 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE

A. Over cementitious backer units on studs, install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America Handbook Method W244.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.

END OF SECTION


09 5100 - SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

Page 1 of 4

SECTION 09 5100

SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system.

B. Acoustical units.



B. Section 23 3700 - Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling.

C. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C 635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2004.

B. ASTM C 636 - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels; 2004.

C. ASTM E 1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 1998.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components and acoustical units.

C. Samples: Submit two samples 4 x 4 inch in size illustrating material and finish of acoustical units as requested by Architect.


A. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation.


A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved.

B. Install acoustical units after interior wet work is dry.


A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

B. Provide full size units equal to 2% percent of amount installed, or two (2) unopened carton of tile, whichever is greater, for each type of tile specified, for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

09 5100 - SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Page 2 of 4

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

2. USG.


B. Acoustical Tile Type ACT-1: with to the following characteristics:

1. Product: "Radar Education ClimaPlus" No. 22541 as manuf. by USG

2. Size: 24 x 48 inches.

3. Thickness: 3/4 inches.

4. Class: A

5. NRC: 0.70, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264.

6. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 40, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264.

7. Edge: Square

8. Color: White.

9. Light Reflectance: 0.84

10. Surface Pattern: Non-directional

11. Suspension System: Exposed grid Type 1.

E. Acoustical Tile Type ACT-2: with to the following characteristics:

1. Product: "Sheetrock Lay-In Ceiling Panel Clima Plus" No. 3270 as manuf. by USG

2. Size: 24 x 48 inches.


4. Class: A

5. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): 40, determined as specified in ASTM E 1264.

6. VOC: Low-Emitting performance meets CA Specification 01350 (CA Dept. of Health Services Standard Practice for the testing of VOC emissions) and is listed on CHPS data base for low-emitting materials.

7. Edge: SQ, Square

8. Color: Flat White.

9. Light Reflectance: 0.77

10. Surface Pattern: Smooth-textured vinyl.

11. Suspension System: Exposed grid Type 1.

2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Manufacturers:

1. Same as for acoustical units.

2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

3. Chicago Metallic Corporation.

4. USG.



B. Suspension Systems - General: ASTM C 635; die cut and interlocking components, with stabilizer bars, splices, and perimeter moldings as required.

C. Exposed Steel Suspension System Type 1: Formed steel, commercial quality cold rolled; heavy-duty.

1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face.

2. Construction: Double web.

3. Finish: White painted.

4. Product: DONN DX by USG.

D. Single Tee Adapter Clip: Provide single tee adapter clips (STAC) used to create code compliant, off-module cross tee connections on Armstrong suspension systems where a cross tee intersects a main beam and is not locked into place with another cross tee.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified.

B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid.

1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid, 7/8" x 7/8"

C. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.

3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636, ASTM E 580, and manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section.

B. Install in accordance with seismec requirements.

C. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum deflection of 1:360.

D. Lay out system to a balanced grid design with edge units no less than 50 percent of acoustical unit size.

E. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete and has been inspected by Architect/Engineer. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work.

F. Hanger wires shall not be supported from metal roof deck.

G. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.

H. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.

I. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability.

J. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or support components independently.


K. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.

L. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other interruptions.

1. Use longest practical lengths.

2. Overlap and rivet corners.

3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS

A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function.

C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.

D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.

E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.

F. Cutting Acoustical Units:

1. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim.

2. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.

G. Where round obstructions occur, provide preformed closures to match perimeter molding.

3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.

END OF SECTION


09 6500 - RESILIENT FLOOR AND BASE COVERINGS

Page 1 of 8

SECTION 09 6500

RESILIENT FLOOR AND BASE COVERINGS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Resilient sheet sports flooring.

B. Sports flooring game line paint.

C. Resilient base.

D. Installation accessories.



B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete slabs and floors.

C. Section 09 6800 – Carpeting

D. Section 09 9650 – Resilient Stair and Landing Covers


A. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2009a.

B. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring; 2008.

C. ASTM F1066 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile; 2004.

D. ASTM F1303 - Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing; 2004 (Reapproved 2009).

E. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008.

F. ASTM F1913 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering Without Backing; 2004.

G. ASTM F2034 - Standard Specification for Sheet Linoleum Floor Covering; 2008.

H. BAAQMD 8-51 - Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51, Adhesive and Sealant Products; www.baaqmd.gov; 2002.

I. FS RR-T-650 - Treads, Metallic and Nonmetallic, Skid Resistant; Federal Specifications and Standards; Revision E, 1994.

J. GEI (SCH) - GREENGUARD "Children and Schools" Certified Products; GREENGUARD Environmental Institute; current listings at www.greenguard.org.

K. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association; 2011.

L. RFCI (RWP) - Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings; Resilient Floor Covering Institute; 1998.

M. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov.

N. SCS (CPD) - SCS Certified Products; Scientific Certification Systems; current listings at www.scscertified.com.

09 6500 - RESILIENT FLOOR AND BASE COVERINGS Page 2 of 8

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements; electronic submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.

C. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Architect's initial selection.


A. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end.

B. Keep boxed materials and adhesives under shelter and from freezing, in accordance with manufacturer's requirements


A. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F.

B. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F.

1.07 EXTRA STOCK

A. One unopened box for each 50 boxes, or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern specified.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 FLOORING

A. Rolled Sheet Vinyl Type 1: SignaFlex 6.5mm Rolled Sheet Vinyl flooring by Signature Sports Flooring with the following characteristics:

1. Construction: High performance polyurethane top layer, clear 100% vinyl wear layer, high-res image layer, reinforcing woven fiberglass inner layer, closed cell foam backing.

2. Reference Specification: ASTM F 1303, Type I, Grade 1.

3. Roll Size: 6.5mm x 1.8m width x 15m long rolls (.256” x 71” x 49.2’).

4. Weight: 4.30 kg/m2.

5. Backing Class: 4-ply fused backing system that includes 1.7mm PVC internal layer and polyester mesh backing.

6. Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s full range of standard colors.

7. Total Thickness: 6.5mm (0.256in.).

8. Sliding Properties: .4 (DIN V18 032-2).

9. Shock Absorption: ≥25% (DIN V18032-2).

10. Vertical Deformation: .6mm (DIN V18032-2).

11. Vertical Ball Rebound: 99% (DIN V18032-2).

12. Behavior under Rolling Load: 1000N (DIN V18032-2).

13. Taber Abrasion: .14g (ASTM D3389-94).

14. Flammability: Pass.

15. Residual Impression: .22mm (DIN V18 032-2).

16. Dimensional Stability: 0.1% (ASTM F2199-02).


17. Width Deformation: 0% (DIN V18032-2).

18. Chemical Resistance Excellent (ASTM F925-02).

2.02 WALL BASE

A. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, thermoset; top set Style B, Cove, and as follows: (RB-1)

1. Height: 4 inch.

2. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick.

3. Finish: Satin.

4. Color: Armstrong, #76 Deep Brown

5. Accessories: Premolded external corners and end stops.

6. Manufacturers:

a. Armstrong

b. Flexco

c. Roppe Corp

d. Mannington

e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.

B. Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer.

1. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by the more stringent of the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168 and the Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51.

C. Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Color-Integrated Vinyl

1. Profiles:

a. (VT0) 1/4 inch carpet to 1/8 inch tile reducer – 1 inch cap

b. (VT2) ¼ inch material to floor reducer – 1-1/4 inch cap

b. (VT8) 1/8 inch underslung resilient floor reducer – 1-5/8 inch cap

2. Color: Armstrong Deep Brown or approved substitution.

D. Sports Flooring Game Line Paint: Endura high gloss EX-2C FC Topcoat Game line two-component type polyurethane paint or equal product recommended by the sports flooring manufacturer.

a. Color: Assume one color as selected by Architect from full range of manufacturer’s standard colors.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners, and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate.


B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive resilient flooring.

C. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.

D. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH.

1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.

E. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces.

F. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F710; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. The General Contractor will supply a smooth, flat concrete finish which will be achieved manually or mechanically. The slab will have a tolerance of ±1/8” in a 10’ radius. No curing compounds are to be used.

B. The concrete sub floor will be cured for a minimum of at least sixty (60) days.

C. Saw cuts are recommended in lieu of construction key way and expansion joints.

D. The concrete floor temperature will have to be maintained at a minimum of 75F during the installation and the Contractor will make sure that the moisture content does not exceed 3 lbs per 1000 square feet in a 24 hour period, according to R.M.A. testing method. (ASTM 1869 04).

E. Before proceeding with any work, inspect the sub floor surface and report in writing to the Project Manager and the General Contractor any visible defects on the surface such as cracks, bumps, rough areas, or variations in planarity.

F. No grease, oil, paint, dust, concrete curing compounds or any contamination should be remaining on the concrete sub floor.

G. Before proceeding with the Signaflex material installations, clean the concrete surface to remove any dirt or foreign materials. Sanding of the sub floor is mandatory.

H. The General Contractor shall patch and repair all cracks, voids, and other imperfections of concrete with high strength portland cement based patching material - Ardex K-15 or equal, approved by the manufacturer. Do not use gypsum based patching materials. If concrete is out of level then it should be properly leveled by an experienced underlayment contractor using cement based material that will provide a minimum of 3,000 p.s.i. compressive strength and sufficient bond to existing clean concrete surface - Ardex K-15 or equal, approved by the manufacturer. After completion of sanding, patching and leveling, vacuum or sweep entire surface of concrete to remove loose dust and dirt before starting the installation of the material.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.

B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.

D. Fit joints tightly.

E. Set flooring in place; press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.


F. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate flooring under centerline of door.

G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where indicated.

H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints.

3.04 SHEET FLOORING

A. Adhesion Methods:

1. Glue material to sub-floor no sooner than 24 hours after the material has been laid in position.

2. Use an acrylic type adhesive, applied with a fine tooth notched trowel, giving coverage of between 100 to 150 square feet per gallon.

3. Recommended Adhesives as approved by manufacturer.

4. Recommended trowel gauge: 1/16” x 1/16” x 1/16” square notched. Throw away blades are recommended in order to maintain proper notch size. Use one blade for approximately 700 square feet of floor area.

B. Recommendations using Adhesives

1. Follow adhesive manufacturer’s instructions after the material has been in place for 24 hours.

2. Respect the open time of the adhesive which will vary according to temperature, humidity, porosity, and absorption rate of the sub-floor.

3. Insufficient open time will cause bubbling. Too long of an open time will result in poor adhesive transfer.

C. Installation of First Sheet Vinyl

1. Strike a chalk line across the center of the playing area. Be sure that the line is square to the room.

2. Lay the first length of Signaflex along this chalk line and then work progressively outward, leaving a small gap between the sheets to allow the material to relax.

3. Material should be unrolled in place for 24 hours prior to adhesion.

4. Starting from the center line and working outward, fold the sheets back halfway and apply the adhesive to the sub-floor.

5. Position the first half into the adhesive, and then repeat this procedure with the second half.

6. Continue laying sheets by butting the edges or overlapping and double cutting through both sheets using a straight edge.

D. Rolling

1. Manually: Immediately after material is positioned onto the adhesive.

2. Using a roller: roll entire surface crossways using a 75 pound (minimum) flooring roller.

E. Seaming of Joints (Heat Welding Method)

1. Mechanical routing using an electric routing machine by Turbo Heat Welding tools or equal approved by the manufacturer.

a. Foam Backed Sheet - Rout only through depth of wear layer.


2. Automatic Electric Welding Machine

a. This is done using a Turbo type automatic welding machine with a variable temperature hot air gun and a multi-outlet nozzle. Set the pressure of the guide to avoid forcing the weld into the seam (see tool manufacturer’s installation procedure).

F. Finishing

1. Trimming is done in two stages once the welding rod and material have cooled.

2. First, trim using a cable slide.

3. Second, trim flush with the floor using a spatula or hook-billed knife.

4. After the welding rod is trimmed smooth or flush with the top surface, check the entire seam to ensure that the welding cord is bonded properly and is flush with the top wear layer.

3.05 HEAT WELDING

A. Heat welding is the recommended procedure for sheet vinyl seams, coving and corner fill pieces. Professionally heat welded seams provide a strong, watertight, hygienic, monolithic surface.

B. The welding rod is made from PVC which is designed to melt at the same temperature as the PVC of the sheet flooring, permanently fusing the two together.

C. Heat welding shall be done after the flooring adhesive has set up, usually the following day.

D. Seam edges shall be slightly gapped and vertical. Wide gapped or undercut seams will prevent quality welds.

E. The depth of the groove shall be 1/2 to 2/3 the thickness of the material. Be careful not to go too deep. The groove shall also be centered along the two edges. This is very important to ensure proper strength and bonding of the welding rod.

F. Clean grooves thoroughly of all foreign contamination, including dust.

G. Use only professional quality welding equipment that will maintain sufficient temperatures. Many types, sizes and styles of welding tips are available today. A tip shall be chosen to produce a quality weld without damaging the appearance of the sheet vinyl.

H. Preheat welding gun before beginning. Temperature shall be set to approximately 750 degrees. It is recommended that the installer perform a test weld on some waste material to verify proper temperature and welding speed prior to welding installed material.

I. Determine the correct welding speed by ensuring that the welding rod actually fuses into the groove. A small ridge shall form on either side of the welding rod, at the vinyl surface. If no ridge forms, you have not heat welded the seam.

J. While the welding rod is still warm, trim off 1/2 -2/3 the excess rod with a spatula knife and trim plate in one continuous movement.

K. After the rod has cooled to room temperature, make the final trim pass using only a razor sharp spatula knife in one continuous movement.

L. Apply a glaze to the surface of the trimmed weld. Remove the tip from the welding gun. Hold the gun a few inches above the welded seam and apply hot air along the seam until the surface of the weld rod begins to shine. The shine should not exceed the sheen level of the flooring. The glazed seam will be less porous, smoother, and less noticeable.


3.06 GAME LINE PAINT A. Surface Preparation: Ensure that the floor is thoroughly scrubbed and free of any wax, oil, or

lint. Mark off the gymnasium floor in accordance with game requirements as shown on architectural drawings. Game lines shall be accurate to layout and width of lines as indicated on plans. Apply solvent resistant masking tape (3M 233+ is the recommended tape), and roll the tape very firmly to ensure the best adhesion.

B. Paint Application: a. Application Temperatures:

i. Use the onsite HVAC unit to maintain ambient temperature and flooring surface temperature at normal application conditions of 18°C (65°F) to 24°C (75°F) at 50% Relative Humidity. For higher humidity above 85% use EX-2C Slow Thinner (5-15%) and/or Endura Retarder. It is important that the temperature of the mixed paint be between 20-24 °C (72° F - 75° F) as it greatly affects viscosity.

ii. Temperatures above or below recommended conditions will decrease or increase the length of drying time.

iii. Surface must be completely dry - Do not apply over moist or damp surfaces. Important: Do not mix more than is required for a 3-6 hour period. We suggest that the two-part paint be mixed with a power drill. Let it stand for half an hour before application.

b. Application Equipment: i. Pure bristle brush or foam brush is recommended. On large jobs a very short nap 1/8"

roller may be used taking caution to prevent air entrapment under the paint. c. Application Procedure:

i. Check to see if color is correct before combining EX-2C Component A and Special Component B. Apply by brush if possible, rollers may cause air entrapment A Unit represents 1 quart of EX-2C Component A combined with 1/2 quart of Special Component B.

ii. Apply two thin wet coats with each coat at a wet film thickness of 50-60 microns (2- 2 ½ mils). Keep flash-off time between coats to a minimum of 30 minutes on smooth surfaces.

iii. Apply Masking tape should be removed as soon as the paint has dried sufficiently to be "tacky". The tape will be difficult to remove if paint is allowed to cure and ragged line edges will occur.

iv. If Endura EX-2C FC Topcoat is allowed to dry longer than 24 hours at normal temperatures, abrade with sandpaper or scotch bright scuff pad before additional applications of topcoat.

3.07 RESILIENT BASE

A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.

B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use premolded units.

C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.

D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.

3.08 CLEANING

A. At completion and when sufficient time has elapsed to permit proper adhesion, make thorough inspection of entire installation.

1. Replace all loose and cracked materials and any other materials that are stained or otherwise defective.

2. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.


B. Immediately prior to date for substantial completion inspection by Architect, wax and buff all materials provided under this section. Waxing materials and methods shall conform to recommendations of resilient material manufacturer.

C. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.

D. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.09 PROTECTION

A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.

END OF SECTION


09 6500 - RESILIENT FLOOR AND BASE COVERINGS

Page 1 of 4

SECTION 09 6550

RESILIENT STAIR AND LANDING COVERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Resilient Stair Treads

1.02 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A. ASTM International:

1. F 2169 Standard Specification for Resilient Stair Treads

2. E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

3. E 648 Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Flooring Systems Using a Radiant Energy Source

4. E 662 Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials.

5. F 925 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Chemicals of Resilient Flooring.

6. F 137 Standard Test Method for Flexibility of Resilient Flooring Materials with Cylindrical Mandrel Apparatus

7. F 1515 Standard Test Method for Measuring Light Stability of Resilient Flooring by Color Change

8. F970 Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit.

9. D2047 Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction as Measured by the James Machine.

10. D 3389 Standard Test Method for Coated Fabrics Abrasion Resistance (Rotary Platform, Double-Head Abrader)

11. F 710 Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring.

12. F 1482 Standard Guide to Wood Underlayment Products Available for Use Under Resilient Flooring

13. D 471 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Effect of Liquids

14. F 386 Standard Test Method for Thickness of Resilient Flooring Materials Having Flat Surfaces

B. Other Referenced Documents

1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 253, Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Energy Source.

2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 255, Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 258 Test Method for Specific Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials.

4. California State Title 24, Section 3306 (r)

5. California Safe Drinking Water and Toxic Enforcement Act of 1986 (Proposition 65).

6. The Collaborative for High Performance Schools (CHPS)


1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer's specification summary sheet for specified products.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, finish colors, patterns and textures.

C. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples for finishes, colors, and textures.

D. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following:

1. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.

2. Manufacturer's Instructions: Manufacturer's installation and maintenance instructions.

E. Submit the following:

1. Maintenance Data: Maintenance data for installed products in accordance with Division 1 sections. Include methods for maintaining installed products, and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance.

2. Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized in installing work similar to that required for this project.

B. Regulatory Requirements

1. Fire Performance characteristics: Provide resilient stair treads with the following Fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products in accordance with ASTM method (and NFPA method) indicated below by a certified testing laboratory or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

a. ASTM E 648 (NFPA 253), Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems: Class 1, Greater than 0.45 w/cm2

b. ASTM E 662 (NFPA 258), Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials: Passes, <450

c. ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255), Surface Building Characteristics of Building Materials: Class C

C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain resilient Stair Treads and manufacturer’s recommended Adhesive from a single supplier.

D. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, Manufacturer’s conditions, recommended adhesive depending on product, substrate type and type of installation, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements. Comply with requirements in Division 1.section 09650 stair treads


A. General: Comply with requirements in Division 1.

B. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid construction delays.

C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with Identification labels intact.

D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and acclimated to site conditions at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.



A. Environmental Requirements/Conditions: In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, areas to receive resilient Stair Treads shall be clean, fully enclosed, weather tight with the permanent HVAC set at a uniform temperature of 65-85 degrees F for 48 hours prior too, during and thereafter installation of resilient Stair Treads. Resilient Stair Treads and adhesive shall be conditioned in the same manner. Resilient Stair Treads must be un-boxed at least 48 hours prior to installation in the areas in which it will be installed.

B. Existing Conditions: Remove existing carpet glue as required for installation of new resilient stair treads and landing tiles.

1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Finishing Operations: Install resilient Stair Treads after finishing operations, painting and ceiling operations etc., have been completed.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Materials Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents.

1. Warranty Period: 1 year limited warranty commencing on Date of Substantial Completion. Notice of any defect must be made in writing to manufacturer within thirty (30) days after buyer learns of the defect.

1.09 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner extra materials from same production run as products installed. Package products with protective covering and identify with descriptive labels. Comply with Division 1 Closeout Submittals (Maintenance Materials) Section.

1. Quantity: Furnish quantity of Resilient Stair Treads equal to 5% of amount installed.

2. Delivery, Storage and Protection: Comply with Owner's requirements for delivery, storage and protection of extra materials.

B. Maintenance of finished floor covering to be conducted per Manufacturer’s Maintenance Guide.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 RESILIENT RUBBER STAIR TREADS, RISER COVERS AND LANDING TILES

A. Manufacturer:

1. Roppe Corporation: (Basis of Design)

2. Armstrong

3. Flexco

4. Roppe Corp

5. Mannington


B. Product: Rubber Stair Treads - Roppe Style #94 Raised Square Design, color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of standard colors.

1. Complies with ASTM F 2169, Type TS, Class 2 (Patterned)

2. Length: 54”. Cut to fit tread length.

3. Depth: 12-1/4” (311.2mm) nominal from inside of nose

4. Thickness: 1/4” (6.35mm) tapering to 1/8” (3.175mm) nominal


5. Nose Length: 1-9/16” (39.70mm) nominal

6. Nose Thickness: 1/4” (6.35mm) nominal

7. Tapered Nose: No

8. Relief Cut: No

9. Limited Wear warranty: Manufacturer’s limited wear warranty of five years for heavy traffic

C. Product: Rubber Base - Roppe Pinnacle Rubber Base, color to match stair treads

1. Use: Riser covers and landing tile base.

2. Height: Match riser height.

3. Height: 6” at landings

4. Length: 54”. Cut to fit riser length.

5. Toe: Standard Toe.

D. Product: Resilient Landing Tile - Roppe Style #994 Raised Square Design, color to match stair treads.

1. Size: 19 11/16" x 19 11/16" (50cm x 50 cm)

2. Nominal Thickness: 1/8" (3.175 mm) Tile thickness without profile: 1/8" (3.17mm): Tile thickness with profile 9/64" (3.57mm): Profile thickness: 1/45" (.559mm)

3. Backing: Smooth factory sanded backing.

4. Limited Wear warranty: Manufacturer’s limited wear warranty of ten years for commercial traffic.

5. Provide matching 6” rubber base at stair landings.

END OF SECTION


09 6800 - CARPETING

Page 1 of 4

SECTION 09 6800

CARPETING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Carpet, tile.

B. Accessories.


A. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.

B. Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Reclamation/Recycling of new carpet scrap, new cushion scrap, removed carpet, and removed carpet cushion.

C. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Restrictions on curing compounds for concrete slabs and floors to receive adhesive-applied carpet.

D. Section 09 6500 – Resilient Floor and Base Coverings


A. ASTM D2859 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials; 2006.

B. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2005.

C. ASTM E648 - Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2009a.

D. CRI (CIS) - Carpet Installation Standard; Carpet and Rug Institute; 2009.

E. CRI (GLA) - Green Label Testing Program - Approved Adhesive Products; Carpet and Rug Institute; Current Edition.

F. CRI (GLP) - Green Label Plus Carpet Testing Program - Approved Products; Carpet and Rug Institute; Current Edition.

G. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; National Fire Protection Association; 2011.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan, method of joining seams, direction of carpet pile and pattern, location of edge moldings and edge bindings.

C. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.

D. Samples: Submit two samples 3 x 3 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each carpet material specified.

E. LEED Report: Submit data documenting VOC content of carpet, cushion, and adhesives; copy of current CRI Approved Products Listing is acceptable.

F. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning.

09 6800 - CARPETING Page 2 of 4


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum three years experience.


A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation.

B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F ambient temperature 24 hours prior to, during and 24 hours after installation.

C. Ventilate installation area during installation and for 72 hours after installation.


A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Full-tiles equal to 5% of amount installed for each type and color specified, but not less than 10 sq. yd.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Carpet:

1. Interface

2. Mannington Commercial


2.02 CARPET

A. Carpet Type CPT-1: Direct glue carpet tile as manufactured by Interface.

1. Style: Primary Stitch

2. Color: #102412 Embroidery/Accent

3. Backing System: GlasBac

4. Yarn System: Post-Consumer Content Type 6,6 Nylon

5. Color System: 100% Solution Dyed

6. Construction: Tufted Textured Loop

7. Preservation Protection: Intersept

8. Soil/Stain Protection: Protek2

9. Pile Thickness: 0.069 inch (1.8 mm)

10. Pile Density: 7,304 oz./yd2

11. Recycled Content: 52%

12. VOC Content: Provide CRI Green Label Plus certified product.

13: Installation: Brick


2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Sub-Floor Filler: Type recommended by carpet manufacturer.

B. Adhesives - General: Compatible with materials being adhered; maximum VOC content of 50 g/L; CRI Green Label certified; in lieu of labeled product, independent test report showing compliance is acceptable.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive carpet.

B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive carpet.

C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesives to sub floor surfaces.

D. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH.

1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.

E. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for carpet installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by carpet manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler.

B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.

C. Clean substrate.


A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.

B. Install carpet and cushion in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI Carpet Installation Standard.

C. Install carpet in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots.

E. Install carpet tight and flat on subfloor, well fastened at edges, with a uniform appearance.

3.04 DIRECT-GLUED CARPET

A. Apply contact adhesive to floor uniformly at rate recommended by manufacturer. After sufficient open time, press carpet into adhesive.

B. Roll with appropriate roller for complete contact of adhesive to carpet backing.

C. Trim carpet neatly at walls and around interruptions.


3.05 CLEANING

A. Remove excess adhesive from floor and wall surfaces without damage.

B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.

END OF SECTION


09 7720 – FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANELS

Page 1 of 4

SECTION 09 7720

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Prefinished polyester glass reinforced plastic sheets and adhered to unfinished gypsum wallboard.

1. PVC trim.

B. Products Not Furnished or Installed under This Section:

1. Gypsum substrate board.

2. Quarry Tile Base.


A. Section 06 1000 – Rough Carpentry

B. Section 09 2116 – Gypsum Board Assemblies

C. Section 09 3000 - Tiling

D. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coatings

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials: Standard Specifications (ASTM)

1. ASTM D 256 - Izod Impact Strengths (ft #/in)

2. ASTM D 570 - Water Absorption (%)

3. ASTM D 638 - Tensile Strengths (psi) & Tensile Modulus (psi)

4. ASTM D 790 - Flexural Strengths (psi) & Flexural Modulus (psi)

5. ASTM D 2583- Barcol Hardness

6. ASTM D 5319 - Standard Specification for Glass-Fiber Reinforced Polyester Wall and Ceiling Panels.

7. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit sufficient manufacturer's data to indicate compliance with these specifications, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

3. Installation methods.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit elevations of each wall showing location of paneling and trim members with respect to all discontinuities in the wall elevation.

C. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer’s standard color pattern selection samples representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

09 7720 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANELS Page 2 of 4

D. Samples for Verification: Submit appropriate section of panel for each finish selected indicating the color, texture, and pattern required.

1. Submit complete with specified applied finish.

2. For selected patterns show complete pattern repeat.

3. Exposed Molding and Trim: Provide samples of each type, finish, and color.

E. Manufacturers Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for adhesives, sealants and other pertinent materials prior to their delivery to the site.


A. Conform to building code requirements for interior finish for smoke and flame spread requirements as tested in accordance with:

1. ASTM E 84 (Method of test for surface burning characteristics of building Materials)

2. Wall Required Rating – Class A and C

B. Sanitary Standards: System components and finishes to comply with:

1. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) requirements for food preparation facilities, incidental contact.

2. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) 1999 Food Code 6-101.11.

3. Canadian Food Inspection Agency (CFIA) requirements.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials factory packaged on strong pallets.

B. Store panels and trim lying flat, under cover and protected from the elements. Allow panels to acclimate to room temperature (70°) for 48 hours prior to installation.


A. Environmental Limitations: Building are to be fully enclosed prior to installation with sufficient heat (70°) and ventilation consistent with good working conditions for finish work

B. During installation and for not less than 48 hours before, maintain an ambient temperature and relative humidity within limits required by type of adhesive used and recommendation of adhesive manufacturer.

1. Provide ventilation to disperse fumes during application of adhesive as recommended by the adhesive manufacturer.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Furnish one year guarantee against defects in material and workmanship.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

3.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER

A. Marlite; 202 Harger Street, Dover, OH 44622. 800-377-1221 FAX (330) 343-4668 Email: [email protected] www.marlite.com.

B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Product:

1. Standard FRP

3.03 PANELS

A. Fiberglass reinforced thermosetting polyester resin panel sheets complying with ASTM D 5319.


1. Coating: Multi-layer print, primer and finish coats or applied over-layer.

2. Dimensions:

a. Thickness – 0.090 “ (2.29mm) nominal

b. Width - 4'-0” (1.22m) nominal

c. Length – as indicated below

3. Tolerance: Length and Width: +/-1/8 “ (3.175mm)

4. Square - Not to exceed 1/8 “ for 8 foot (2.4m) panels or 5/32 “ (3.96mm) for 10 foot (2.4m) panels

B. Properties: Resistant to rot, corrosion, staining, denting, peeling, and splintering.

1. Flexural Strength - 1.0 x 104 psi per ASTM D 790. (7.0 kilogram-force/square millimeter)

2. Flexural Modulus - 3.1 x 105 psi per ASTM D 790. (217.9 kilogram-force/square millimeter)

3. Tensile Strength - 7.0 x 103 psi per ASTM D 638. (4.9 kilogram-force/square millimeter)

4. Tensile Modulus - 1.6 x 105 psi per ASTM D 638. (112.5 kilogram-force/square millimeter)

5. Water Absorption - 0.72% per ASTM D 570.

6. Barcol Hardness (scratch resistance) of 35 55 as per ASTM D 2583.

7. Izod Impact Strength of 72 ft. lbs./in ASTM D 256

C. Back Surface: Smooth.

D. Front Finish:

1. FRP Type– Marlite Standard FRP – Kitchen walls.

a. Pebbled finish

b. Color: 151 Light Grey

c. Class A (I) Fire rating

E. Size:

1. Marlite Standard FRP

a. 48” x 108” [1.2m x 2.7m] x .090” (3mm) nom.

b. Minimize seams

3.04 MOLDINGS

A. PVC Trim: Thin-wall semi-rigid extruded PVC. – Kitchen Area

1. M 350 Inside Corner, 10’ length

2. M 360 Outside Corner, 10’ length

3. M 365 Division, 10’ length

4. M 370 Edge, 10’ length

5. Color: Match panel color

3.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesive: Either of the following construction adhesives complying with ASTM C 557.

1. Marlite C-551 FRP Adhesive - Water- resistant, non-flammable adhesive.

2. Titebond Advanced Polymer Panel Adhesive – VOC compliant, non-flammable, environmentally safe adhesive.


B. Sealant:

1. Marlite Brand MS-250 Clear Silicone Sealant.

2. Marlite Brand - Color Match Sealant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Examine backup surfaces to determine that corners are plumb and straight, surfaces are smooth, uniform, clean and free from foreign matter, nails countersunk, joints and cracks filled flush and smooth with the adjoining surface.

1. Verify that stud spacing does not exceed 24” (61cm) on-center.

B. Repair defects prior to installation.

1. Level wall surfaces to panel manufacturer’s requirements. Remove protrusions and fill indentations.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's recommended procedures and installation sequence.

B. Cut sheets to meet supports allowing 1/8” (3 mm) clearance for every 8 foot (2.4m) of panel.

1. Cut and drill with carbide tipped saw blades or drill bits, or cut with shears.

2. Pre-drill fastener holes 1/8” (3mm) oversize with high speed drill bit.

C. Space at 8” (200mm) maximum on center at perimeter, approximately 1” from panel edge.

D. Space at in field in rows 16’ (40.64cm) on center, with fasteners spaced at 12” (30.48 cm) maximum on center.

E. Apply panels to board substrate, above base, vertically oriented with seams plumb and pattern aligned with adjoining panels.

1. Install panels with manufacturer's recommended gap for panel field and corner joints.

F. Adhesive trowel and application method to conform to adhesive manufacturer’s recommendations.

G. Drive fasteners for snug fit. Do not over-tighten.

H. Apply panel moldings to all panel edges using silicone sealant providing for required clearances.

1. All moldings must provide for a minimum 1/8 “ (3mm) of panel expansion at joints and edges, to insure proper installation.

2. Apply sealant to all moldings, channels and joints between the system and different materials to assure watertight installation.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Remove excess sealant from panels and moldings. Wipe panel down using a damp cloth and mild soap solution or cleaner.

B. Refer to manufacturer's specific cleaning recommendations Do not use abrasive cleaners.

END OF SECTION


09 9000 - PAINTING AND COATING

Page 1 of 8

SECTION 09 9000

PAINTING AND COATING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Surface preparation.

B. Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings.

C. Scope: Finish all interior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished, finish exterior surfaces as indicated and unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mechanical and Electrical:

a. In finished areas, paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, and boxes, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.

B. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry; solid wood casing

C. Section 08 1416 – Flush Wood Doors

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.


A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.

B. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 2012.

C. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-Base Materials; 2007.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for each:

1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel"), product data including VOC content.

2. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each system.

C. Samples: Submit two painted samples, illustrating selected colors and textures for each color and system selected with specified coats cascaded. Submit on white cardboard stock, 8"x8" in size.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures and substrate conditions requiring special attention.

E. Maintenance Data:

1. Submit color mix formulas for each paint color used.

2. Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces.

09 9000 - PAINTING AND COATING Page 2 of 8


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with minimum five years’ experience.


A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.

B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.


A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.

C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

F. Provide lighting level of 80 ft. candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no exceptions.

B. In order to define requirements for quality, grades, and etc., material specifications designate manufacturer, brands, and systems. Products of the following manufacturers, complying with drawings and specifications will be acceptable:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com.

2. Diamond Vogel

3. ICI

4. Sherwin Williams


2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL

A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.

1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.


2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

3. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run.

4. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.

B. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.

C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:

1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following:

a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings.

b. Ozone Transport Commission (OTC) Model Rule, Architectural, Industrial, and Maintenance Coatings; www.otcair.org; specifically:

1) Opaque, Flat: 50 g/L, maximum.

2) Opaque, Nonflat: 150 g/L, maximum.

3) Opaque, High Gloss: 250 g/L, maximum.

4) Varnishes: 350 g/L, maximum.

2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited:

1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).

2. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene chloride, naphthalene, toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane, vinyl chloride.

E. Colors: As indicated on Finish Legend

1. Extend colors to surface edges; colors may change at inside/outside edge as directed by Architect.

2. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the wall/ceiling they are mounted on/under.

2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR

A. Fiber Cement Board, opaque:

1. Opaque, Industrial 100% acrylic latex, semi-gloss finish, 3 coats:

a. 1st coat: Sherwin Williams, Loxon Acrylic Concrete/Masonry Primer.

b. 2nd coat: Sherwin Williams, Pro Industrial Acrylic B66-650 Semi-Gloss, Spray Applied

c. 3rd coat: Same as 2nd coat.


2. Application, provide finish for the following:

a. Exterior cement board siding panels and trim accessories

B. Wood, Transparent:

1. Stain and UV resistant clear finish, satin finish, alkyd, 3 coats.

a. 1st coat: Sikkens Cetol 1 RE Translucent Satin Wood Finish SIK410XX

b. 2nd coat: Sikkens Cetol 23 Plus RE Translucent Satin Top Coat

c. 3rd coat: Same as 2nd coat.

2. Provide finish on the following surfaces:

a. Exterior wood siding and soffit.

b. Interior wood siding and soffit

3. Note all 6 sides of siding boards (including shiplap) are to be pre-finished with 1st coat and 2nd coat prior to installation. Finish cut ends during installation. Apply 3rd coat after siding installation complete.

C. Ferrous Metals Unprimed, Opaque:

1. 3 ct, semi-gloss acrylic latex, opaque finish for ferrous metals. 1st coat may be touch-up on previously primed surfaces

a. 1st coat: S-W PRO INDUSTRIAL Pro-Cryl Universal Acrylic Primer, B66-310 Series

b. 2nd coat: S-W Metalatex Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B42 Series

c. 3rd coat: S-W Metalatex Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B42 Series

2. Provide finish for the following items.

a. Exposed gas service piping.

b. Miscellaneous exposed unfinished metals.

D. Ferrous Metals - High Performance Coating; Aliphatic Polyurethane Coating, two-part aliphatic polyurethane, semi-gloss finish, three coats.

1. Product characteristics:

a. Dry film thickness, per coat: 2.5 mils minimum

2. 1st coat: Polymide Epoxy; Tnemec Series 66, High Build Epoxoline

3. 2nd coat: Polymide Epoxy; Tnemec Series 66, High Build Epoxoline

4. 3rd coat: Aliphatic Polyurethane; Tnemec Series 73, Endura-Sheild

5. Provide Aliphatic Polyurethane Coating at the following locations:

a. Exterior bollards.

2.04 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR

A. Gypsum Board - Latex, 3 Coats:

1. Eggshell finish, acrylic latex, opaque, 3 coats:

a. 1st coat: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer.

b. 2nd coat: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Egg-Shell, B24 Series

c. 3rd coat: Same as 2nd coat


2. Provide on the following:

a. Gypsum board walls and ceilings.

B. Gypsum Board - Epoxy, 3 Coats:

1. Satin finish, epoxy latex, opaque, 3 coats:

a. Walls prepped with Hi-Build Vinyl

b. 1st coat: S-W ProMar 200 Latex Primer.

c. 2nd coat: S-W Pro Industrial Hi-Bild Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy Coating Low Lustre, Series B71.

d. 3rd coat: S-W Pro Industrial Hi-Bild Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy Coating Low Lustre, Series B71.

2. Provide on the following

a. Gypsum board walls in toilet rooms.

C. Wood - Transparent Finish, Satin

1. Same as exterior wood, transparent finish


a. Interior wood trim

D. Wood - Transparent Finish, Satin

1. Stain finish with transparent top coats, stain finish, 3 cts

a. 1st coat: MINWAX250 VOC penetrating oil based stain

b. 2nd coat: MINWAX Procrylic Finish Acrylic Polyurethane Satin.

c. 3rd coat: MINWAX Procrylic Finish Acrylic Polyurethane Satin.


a. Interior wood doors.

E. Wood - Opaque Finish - Latex, 3 Coats:

1. Satin finish, acrylic latex, opaque, 3 coats.

a. 1st coat: S-W Premium Wall & Wood Primer

b. 2nd coat: S-W ProClassic Interior Acrylic Latex Enamel Semi-Gloss, B20 Series.

c. 3rd coat: S-W ProClassic Interior Acrylic Latex Enamel Semi-Gloss, B20 Series.

2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically indicated or not; commercial quality.

B. Patching Material: Latex filler.

C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.


C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application.

D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

E. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.

F. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums, or less as required by manufacturer:

1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.

2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.

3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.

4. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

C. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects.

D. Remove surface appurtenances, including electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.

E. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects.

F. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.

G. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

H. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.

I. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.

J. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.

K. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs.

L. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.

M. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.


N. Interior Wood Surfaces to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats. Prime concealed surfaces with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with thinner.

O. Exterior Wood to Receive Transparent Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter; seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior caulking compound after sealer has been applied. Prime concealed surfaces.

P. Wood Doors to be Field-Finished: Seal wood door top and bottom edge surfaces with clear sealer.

Q. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately.

B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied.

D. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied.

E. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.

F. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.

G. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat.

H. Interior Concrete Masonry surfaces with opaque finish; block filler shall be spray applied and back-rolled. Typical for each coat of block filler specified.

I. Whenever necessary to obtain uniform finish, a whole wall shall be refinished rather than spot finishing damaged or unsatisfactory finish.

J. Doors and Frames to receive opaque finish

1. Remove hardware from doors, paint as specified, and reinstall hardware.

2. Prime and paint all surfaces and edges, including door top and bottom edge surfaces.

3. Apply finish with spray equipment

K. Wood to Receive Transparent Finishes: Tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface.

L. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing.

3.04 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Refer to Section 22 0553 and Section 26 0553 for schedule of color coding of equipment, duct work, piping, and conduit.

B. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately.

C. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site.


3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect finished coatings until completion of project.

B. Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


10 1101 - VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS

Page 1 of 2

SECTION 10 1101

VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Markerboards and Tackboards.


A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Installation

B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Concealed supports in metal stud walls.


A. ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; 2004.

B. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 1999.

C. ASTM A424 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, for Porcelain Enameling; 2009a.

D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2010.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on markerboard, tackboard, trim, and accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate wall elevations, dimensions, joint locations, special anchor details.


1.06 WARRANTY


B. Provide five year warranty for chalkboard and markerboard to include warranty against discoloration due to cleaning, crazing or cracking, and staining.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Visual Display Boards:

1. MooreCo, Inc: www.moorecoinc.com.

2. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc: www.claridgeproducts.com.

3. Day-Bright


2.02 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS

A. Markerboards: Porcelain enamel on steel, laminated to core.

1. 800 Series as manufactured by Claridge or equal.

2. Color: Beige.

3. Metal Face Sheet Thickness: 0.024 inch (24 gage), LCS Markerboard.

4. Core: Particleboard, 3/8 inch thick, laminated to face sheet.

5. Backing: 0.015" Aluminum Sheet Panel, laminated to core.

10 1101 - VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS Page 2 of 2

6. Size: As indicated in schedule.

7. Frame: 5/8" wide, Extruded aluminum, with concealed fasteners.

8. Frame Finish: Anodized, natural.

9. Accessories: Provide chalk tray and map rail.

B. Tackboards: Fine-grained, colored cork.

1. 800 Series as manufactured by Claridge or equal.

2. Cork: 1/4 inch Claridge Cork.

3. Backing: Hardboard, 1/4 inch thick, laminated to tack surface.

4. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25, maximum, and smoke developed index of 450, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

5. Size: As indicated in schedule.

6. Frame: Extruded aluminum, with concealed fasteners.

7. Frame Finish: Anodized, natural.

C. Configuration: As indicated on drawings.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Porcelain Enameled Steel Sheet: ASTM A424, Type I, Commercial Steel, with fired-on vitreous finish.

B. Hardboard for Cores: AHA A135.4, Class 1 - Tempered, S2S (smooth two sides).

C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; wood chips, set with waterproof resin binder, sanded faces.

D. Aluminum Sheet Backing: 0.015 inch thick.

E. Adhesives: Type used by manufacturer.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Map Rail: Extruded aluminum, manufacturer's standard profile, with cork insert and runners for accessories; 1 inch wide overall, full width of frame.

B. Chalk Tray: Aluminum, manufacturer's standard profile one piece full length of chalkboard, molded ends; concealed fasteners, same finish as frame.

C. Mounting Brackets: Concealed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.

B. Verify that internal wall blocking is ready to receive work and positioning dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install boards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install top of boards 7’-2” above finished floor.

C. Secure units level and plumb.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Clean board surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

END OF SECTION


10 1400 - SIGNAGE

Page 1 of 3

SECTION 10 1400

SIGNAGE

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Room and door signs. Match existing building signage.


A. Section 06 6100 - Rough Carpentry; wall blocking


A. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design).

B. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign styles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign.

C. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication, including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, mounting and colors.

D. Selection Samples: Where colors are not specified, submit two sets of color selection charts or chips.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation templates and attachment devices.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.


A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation.

B. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature.

PART 2 PRODUCTS:

2.01 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS

A. Accessibility Compliance: All signs are required to comply with ADA Standards for Accessible Design and ANSI/ICC A 117.1 and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements.

2.02 PLAQUE SIGNS

A. General:

1. Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated:

a. Character Font: Helvetica.

b. Character Case: Upper case only.

10 1400 - SIGNAGE Page 2 of 3

c. Background Color: As selected by Architect.

d. Character Color: Contrasting color.

B. Signage Type A, Plaque Sign, Room Number/Identification sign.

1. Classroom Interior Plaque Sign.

a. 6"H x 6"W, engraved panel sign with face of PVC/vinyl acetate bonded to 3/8" acrylic mounting plate, with square edges and corners, matte finish.

b. Provide "tactile" signage, with 1" letters raised minimum 1/32 inch and Grade II braille.

c. Provide 1” clear slot for removable name.

c. Mounting: double faced tape.

d. Copy for sign to be verified with Owner/Architect and to include:

1) 3 digit number, with braille

C. Signage Type B, Plaque Sign, Room Number/Identification sign.

1. Interior Plaque Sign.

a. 6"H x 6"W, engraved panel sign with face of PVC/vinyl acetate bonded to 3/8" acrylic mounting plate, with square edges and corners, matte finish.


c. Provide 1” clear slot for changeable room name.



1) 3 digit number, with braille

2) Room name

D. Signage Type C, Plaque Sign; Identification Sign.

1. Toilet Room Interior plaque sign.

a. 6" H x 6" W, engraved panel sign with face of PVC/vinyl acetate bonded to 3/8" acrylic mounting plate, with square edges and corners, matte finish.




1) MEN, with universal men symbol, braille; 1 ea.

2) WOMEN, with universal women symbol, braille; 1 ea.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Concealed Screws: Stainless steel or hot-dipped galvanized steel.

B. Exposed Screws: Stainless steel.

C. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive.

10 1400 - SIGNAGE Page 3 of 3

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level.

C. Locate signs where indicated and in accordance with ADA requirements:

1. Room and Door Signs: Locate on wall at latch side of door with:

a. Bottom of uppermost line of tactile letter; max of 60" above floor

b. Bottom of lowest line of tactile letter; min 48" above floor

c. Centerline of sign min 9" from edge of door

D. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damaged items.

END OF SECTION


10 2113.19 - PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

Page 1 of 2

SECTION 10 2113

METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART-1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Steel compartment work includes the following:

1. Floor anchored/overhead braced partitions.

B. Furnish all labor and materials necessary for the completion of work in this section as shown on the contract drawings and specified herein.

C. Work in this section shall include but is not limited to:

1. Toilet compartments

2. Hardware for toilet compartments

3. Shop drawings and working drawings

4. Manufacturer’s guarantee

D. Related work specified elsewhere shall include accessories and anchorage/blocking for attachment of compartments.

1.02 PRODUCTS

A. Submittal of shop drawings and details, for Architect’s approval.

B. Colors shall be selected from the manufacturer’s standard range of colors.

C. Color and hardware samples shall be submitted for approval to the Architect upon request.

PART-2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. ASI Global Partitions

B. Bradley Corporation

C. Bobrick

D. Accurate

E. Hadrian

F. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Doors and panels shall be 1” thick, constructed of two sheets of 22-gauge, galvanized, stretcher-leveled quality steel formed and bonded under pressure with a non-toxic adhesive to a resin-impregnated, sound-deadening honeycomb core.

B. Pilasters shall be 1-1/4”, constructed of two sheets of 22-gauge, galvanized steel, formed and bonded under pressure with a non-toxic adhesive to a full resin-impregnated, sound-deadening full-face honeycomb core.

2.03 CONSTRUCTION

A. Doors and panels shall be 1” thick. The perimeter shall be sealed with a 22-gauge steel interlocking molding. Molding corners shall be welded to each other and to face sheets and ground smooth to form a rigid frame around the component.

10 2113.19 - PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS Page 2 of 2

B. Pilasters shall be 1-1/4” thick. The perimeter shall be sealed with a 22-gauge steel interlocking molding. An inverted stirrup with a jack bolt for leveling during installation and permanent height adjustment shall be welded within the base of each pilaster. “L” brackets shall be coupled to the stirrup bracket and floor for full range adjustment. A shoe shall conceal each mounting, having an internal cross section conforming to the pilaster, and being formed of type 304 stainless steel #4 finish.

C. Headrail shall be provided to bridge all compartments and brace the end freestanding pilasters to the wall; the headrail shall be anodized aluminum satin finish, contoured to provide anti-grip feature.

D. All units shall be cleaned prior to application of a baked hybrid powder coating of at least 1.3 mil thickness.

2.04 HARDWARE

A. All exposed door hardware shall be as noted:

1. Continuous stainless steel hinge. Door hardware shall include a coat hook, bumper, stop, keeper a concealed latch with emergency access and stainless steel vandal resistant fasteners.

B. Panel and pilaster brackets shall be as noted:

1. Stirrup brackets shall be 2 1/8” long die cast stainless steel. Stirrup brackets shall be 1/8” thick and mounted with stainless steel vandal resistant fasteners. The attachment of brackets to the adjacent wall construction shall be accomplished with 2 ½” stainless steel vandal resistant screws and plastic anchors.

C. Pilaster shoes shall be stainless steel 3” high with a #4 satin finish.

D. Headrail shall be made of heavy-duty anodized extruded aluminum (6063-T5 alloy). Headrail is anti-grip and attaches to the top of the pilaster with stainless steel vandal resistant screws.

E. Headrail brackets shall be made from a die cast aluminum alloy and shall be attached to the adjacent wall construction with 2 ½” stainless steel vandal resistant screws and plastic anchors.

PART-3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Examine areas to receive toilet compartments for correct height and spacing of anchorage/blocking and plumbing fixtures that may affect installation of compartments. Report any discrepancies to the Architect.

B. Take complete and accurate measurements of toilet compartment locations.

C. Start of work constitutes acceptance of job.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install compartments in a rigid, straight, plumb and level manner as shown on the shop drawings and manufacturer’s installation instructions.

B. All doors and panels to be mounted at 12” above the finished floor unless otherwise specified.

C. Clearance at vertical edges of door shall be uniform top to bottom.

D. No evidence of cutting, drilling and/or patching shall be visible on the finished work.

E. Finished surfaces shall be cleaned after installation and be left free of all imperfections.

3.03 WARRANTY

A. 3 years from the date of substantial completion.

END OF SECTION


10 2800 – TOILET ACCESSORIES

Page 1 of 4

SECTION 10 2800

TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Accessories for toilet rooms, showers, residential bathrooms, and utility rooms.

B. Grab bars.


A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry; wall blocking.


A. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design).

B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013.

C. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.

D. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1.

E. ASTM C1503 - Standard Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror; 2008.


A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement to receive anchor attachments.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment methods.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. In order to define requirements for quality, function, sizes, and materials, specifications are based upon the products of ASI - American Specialties. Products of the following manufacturers, complying with requirements of drawings and specifications will be acceptable:

1. Bobrick

2. Bradley

3. Nutone

4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.

1. Grind welded joints smooth.

10 2800 – TOILET ACCESSORIES Page 2 of 4

2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces.

B. Keys: Provide 3 keys for each accessory to Owner; master key all lockable accessories.

C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304.

D. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 coating.

E. Mirror Glass: Float glass, ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering, protective and physical characteristics complying with ASTM C1503.

F. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof.

G. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Stainless Steel.

2.03 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES

A. (SD) Soap Dispensers - Surface Mounted:

1. Bradley #2017-15 or equal

2. Fabricated of 20 ga. stainless steel, type 304, No. 4 satin finish.

3. All purpose soap valve, with plastic valve body and non-corroding chrome-plated brass, stainless steel, and ABS plastic internal parts. Valve operation shall meet ADA requirements.

4. Hinged refill door with key access, provide two keys for each lock.

C. (PT1) Paper Towel Dispenser: Surface mounted.

1. Provided by the Owner installed by the General Contractor

D. (M1) Mirror:

1. Bradley #780-2436 or equal

2. Clear float type with copper and silver coating, organic overcoating, square and polished edges, 6 mm thickness min.

2. 24” x 36”

E. (GB1) (GB2) (GB3) Grab Bars:

1. Bradley #832 Series or equal. Length as indicated on the drawings.

2. Fabricated to comply with ASTM F 446 and to withstand a 900 pound force, from type 304, 18-8 alloy, stainless steel with # 4 satin finish.

3. Tubing: 1-1/4 inch outside diameter, 18 gage, formed 1-1/2 inch radius at wall, smooth satin finish.

4. Flange: 11 gauge, 3 inch diameter, 1/2 inch deep, with concealed fasteners.

F. (SND) Sanitary Napkin Disposal - Surface Mounted:

1. Bradley #4722-15 or equal.

2. Door and cabinet fabricated from 22 ga., type 304, stainless steel, no. 4 satin finish.

3. Shelf fabricated from 16 ga., type 304, stainless steel, no.4 satin finish.

G. Toilet Paper Holder - Surface Mounted:

1. Provided by Owner installed by General Contractor.


2.04 UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Mop Holder:

1. American Specialties, Inc; Model 8215-3.

2. 26 inch length with three mop holders.

3. Fabricated of one-piece hi-hat channel, 20 gauge, type 304 stainless steel, # 4 satin finish.

4. Mop Holder: Pivoting spring loaded serrated rubber cam.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. Verify wall blocking is installed.

B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.

C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings.

3.02 PREPARATION

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, in accordance with ADA, and in locations indicated on the drawings.

B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. Coordinate fastener type with wall construction.

C. Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations. Notify Architect of discrepancies and/or conflict

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed accessories from damage due to subsequent construction operations.

3.05 SCHEDULE

A. Janitor 107A:

1. Mop Holder 1 each

B. Kitchen 142

1. Paper Towel Dispenser 2 each

2. Soap Dispenser 2 each

3. Mop Holder 1 each

C. Boys 120 and Girls 121:



3. Mirror 2 each

4. Toilet Paper Holder 2 each

5. Grab Bars, 36” and 42” horiz. and 18" vert. 1 each


D. Women 145 and Women 247:



3. Mirror 1 each



6. Sanitary Napkin Disposal 2 each

E. Men 147 and Men 247:



3. Mirror 1 each



F. Engineering Classrooms 122, 133 and 215


2. Soap Dispenser, counter mounted 1 each

END OF SECTION


10 4400 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

Page 1 of 2

SECTION 10 4400

FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Fire extinguishers.

B. Fire extinguisher cabinets.


A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.


A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2013.

B. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions and rough-in measurements for recessed cabinets.

C. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features.


A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fire Extinguishers, Fire Extinguisher Cabinets, and Accessories:

1. Ansul, Inc: www.ansul.com.

2. Pyro-Chem: www.pyrochem.com.

3. Strike First Corporation of America: www.strikefirstusa.com.

4. JL Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com.

5. Larsen's Manufacturing Co: www.larsensmfg.com.


2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes, whichever is more stringent.

1. Provide extinguishers labeled by UL for the purpose specified and indicated.

B. Have extinguishers certified and tagged as required by local Authority Having Jurisdiction.

C. Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Carbon steel tank, with pressure gage.

1. Class: A:B:C., MP Series

2. Size: 10 pound.

10 4400 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES Page 2 of 2

3. Finish: Baked polyester powder coat, color as selected.

4. Temperature range: -65 degrees F to 120 degrees F.

5. With manufacturer's standard wall bracket for mounting within fire extinguisher cabinet

C. Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Carbon steel tank, with pressure gage.

1. Class: K

2. Size: 15 pound.

3. Finish: Baked polyester powder coat, color as selected.

4. Temperature range: -65 degrees F to 120 degrees F.

5. With manufacturer's standard wall bracket for mounting within fire extinguisher cabinet

6. Provide at Kitchen 142

2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

A. Cameo Series C2409-R as manufactured by Larsen or equal

B. Cabinet Configuration: Recessed type.

1. Sized to accommodate indicated fire extinguisher.

2. Exterior nominal dimensions: 13 inch wide x 27 1/2 inch high x 5/16 inch deep.

3. Rough opening dimensions: 10 1/2 inch wide x 25 inch high x 4 inch deep

4. Flat trim 5/16" projection.

5. Cabinet and door to be cold rolled steel with baked enamel finish, white color.

6. Satin finish door pull with roller catch

7. Continuous piano hinge.

8. Bubble design, clear acrylic, no letters.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, 40" inches from finished floor to wall bracket at top of extinguisher in cabinet.

C. Secure rigidly in place.

D. Place extinguishers in cabinets.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 11400

FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes food service equipment indicated on Drawings and schedules.

B. Owner-Furnished Equipment: Where indicated, Owner will furnish equipment items.

C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for equipment supports. 2. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for wood casework and

plastic-laminate substrates. 3. Division 11 Section "Unit Kitchens." 4. Refer to Division 15 Sections for supply and exhaust fans; exhaust ductwork;

service roughing-ins; drain traps; atmospheric vents; valves, pipes, and fittings; fire-extinguishing systems; and other materials required to complete food service equipment installation.

5. Refer to Division 16 Sections for connections to fire alarm systems, wiring, disconnects, and other electrical materials required to complete food service equipment installation.

D. Allowances: Furnish food service equipment under the allowances indicated as specified in Division 1 Section "Allowances."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Terminology Standard: Refer to NSF 2, "Food Equipment" or other applicable NSF standards for definitions of food service equipment and installation terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in other referenced standards.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of food service equipment indicated. Include manufacturer's model number and accessories and requirements for access and maintenance clearances, water and drainage, power or fuel, and service-connections including roughing-in dimensions.

B. Shop Drawings: For food service equipment not manufactured as standard production and catalog items by manufacturers. Include plans, elevations, sections, roughing-in dimensions, fabrication details, service requirements, and attachments to other work. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Details of wiring for power, signal, and control systems and

differentiating between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

2. Piping Diagrams: Details of piping systems and differentiating between manufacturer-installed and field-installed piping.

C. Coordination Drawings: For locations of food service equipment and service utilities. Key equipment with item numbers and descriptions indicated in Contract Documents. Include plans and elevations of equipment, access- and maintenance-clearance requirements, details of concrete or masonry bases and floor depressions, and service-utility characteristics.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for exposed products with color finishes.

E. Samples for Verification: Of each type of exposed finish required, minimum 4-inch- (100-mm-) square or 6-inch- (150-mm-) long sections of linear shapes and of same thickness and material indicated for work. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.

F. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of refrigeration systems or their authorized agents certifying that systems furnished comply with requirements and will maintain operating temperatures indicated in the areas or equipment that they will serve.

G. Maintenance Data: Operation, maintenance, and parts data for food service equipment to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include a product schedule as follows: 1. Product Schedule: For each food service equipment item, include item number

and description indicated in Contract Documents, manufacturer's name and model number, and authorized service agencies' addresses and telephone numbers.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing food service equipment, who has completed installations similar in design and extent to that indicated for this Project, and who has a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing food service equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of food service equipment through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Product Options: Drawings indicate food service equipment based on the specific products indicated. Other manufacturers' equipment with equal size and performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."

E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) codes: 1. NFPA 17, "Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems." 2. NFPA 17A, "Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems." 3. NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code." 4. NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code." 5. NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking

Operations."

F. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated equipment or components specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code,

Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing

Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

G. AGA Certification: Provide gas-burning appliances certified by the American Gas Association (AGA).

H. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label steam-generating and closed steam-heating equipment to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

I. ASHRAE Compliance: Provide mechanical refrigeration systems complying with the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers' ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."

J. NSF Standards: Comply with applicable NSF International (NSF) standards and criteria and provide NSF Certification Mark on each equipment item, unless otherwise indicated.

K. ANSI Standards: Comply with applicable ANSI standards for electric-powered and gas-burning appliances; for piping to compressed-gas cylinders; and for plumbing fittings, including vacuum breakers and air gaps, to prevent siphonage in water piping.

L. SMACNA Standard: Where applicable, fabricate food service equipment to comply with the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association's (SMACNA) "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines," unless otherwise indicated.

M. Seismic Restraints: Provide seismic restraints for food service equipment according to the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association's (SMACNA) "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines," appendix 1, "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Kitchen Equipment," unless otherwise indicated.

N. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."

O. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." Review methods and procedures related to food service equipment including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review access requirements for equipment delivery. 2. Review equipment storage and security requirements. 3. Inspect and discuss condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed

by other trades. 4. Review structural loading limitations. 5. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,

Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.


A. Deliver food service equipment as factory-assembled units with protective crating and covering.

B. Store food service equipment in original protective crating and covering and in a dry location.


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of food service equipment installation areas by field measurements before equipment fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without

delaying the Work, establish required dimensions and proceed with fabricating equipment without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate equipment layout and installation with other work, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and fire-suppression system components.

B. Coordinate location and requirements of service-utility connections.

C. Coordinate size, location, and requirements of concrete bases, positive slopes to drains, floor depressions, and insulated floors. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

D. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."

1.9 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. 13 Month Labor & Parts Warranty.

B. Refrigeration Compressor Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace compressors that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Breakage. 2. Faulty operation. 3. Warranty Period for compressor: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher leveled, and in finish specified in "Stainless-Steel Finishes" Article.

B. Stainless-Steel Tube: ASTM A 554, Grade MT-304, and in finish specified in "Stainless-Steel Finishes" Article.

C. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G115 (ASTM A 653M, Z350) coating designation; commercial quality; cold rolled; stretcher leveled; and chemically treated.

D. Zinc-Coated Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M), zinc-coated according to ASTM A 123 requirements.

E. Plastic Laminate: Complying with NEMA LD 3 and NSF 35 requirements; NSF certified for end-use application indicated; 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) thick for horizontal and vertical surfaces and 0.042 inch (1.07 mm) thick for post-formed surfaces; smooth texture; and easily cleanable. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

F. Plywood and Lumber: Provide plywood and lumber as specified in Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork."

G. Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. Provide elastomeric sealant NSF certified for end-use application indicated. Provide sealant that, when cured and washed, meets requirements of Food and Drug Administration's 21 CFR, Section 177.2600 for use in areas that come in contact with food. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2. Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene, in diameter larger than joint width.

H. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select). Provide products complying with ANSI Z97.1, manufactured by horizontal (roller-hearth) process, and 6 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated. Provide exposed safety edges, if any, seamed before tempering.

I. Plastic: Except for plastic laminate, provide plastic materials and components complying with NSF 51.

J. Sound Dampening: NSF-certified, nonabsorbent, hard-drying, sound-deadening coating. Provide coating compounded for permanent adhesion to metal in 1/8-inch (3-mm) thickness that does not chip, flake, or blister.

K. Gaskets: NSF certified for end-use application indicated; of resilient rubber, neoprene, or PVC that is nontoxic, stable, odorless, nonabsorbent, and unaffected by exposure to foods and cleaning compounds.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Cabinet Hardware: Provide NSF-certified, stainless-steel hardware for equipment items as indicated.

B. Casters: NSF-certified, standard-duty, stainless-steel, swivel stem casters with 5-inch- (125-mm-) diameter wheels, polyurethane tires with 1-inch (25-mm) tread width, and 200-lb (90-kg) load capacity per caster. Provide brakes on 2 casters per unit.

2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Fabricate food service equipment according to NSF 2 requirements. Factory assemble equipment to greatest extent possible.

B. Plastic-Laminate and Wood Casework: Fabricate according to requirements specified in Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork."

C. Welding: Use welding rod of same composition as metal being welded. Use methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metal. Provide ductile welds free of mechanical imperfections such as gas holes, pits, or cracks. 1. Welded Butt Joints: Provide full-penetration welds for full-joint length. Make joints

flat, continuous, and homogenous with sheet metal without relying on straps under seams, filling in with solder, or spot welding.

2. Grind exposed welded joints flush with adjoining material and polish to match adjoining surfaces.

3. Where fasteners are welded to underside of equipment, finish reverse side of weld smooth and undepressed.

4. Coat unexposed stainless-steel welded joints with suitable metallic-based paint to prevent corrosion.

5. After zinc-coated steel is welded, clean welds and abraded areas and apply SSPC-Paint 20, high-zinc-dust-content, galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

D. Fabricate field-assembled equipment prepared for field-joining methods indicated. For metal butt joints, comply with referenced SMACNA standard, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Where stainless steel is joined to a dissimilar metal, use stainless-steel welding material or fastening devices.

F. Form metal with break bends that are not flaky, scaly, or cracked in appearance; where breaks mar uniform surface appearance of material, remove marks by grinding, polishing, and finishing.

G. Sheared Metal Edges: Finish free of burrs, fins, and irregular projections.

H. Provide surfaces in food zone, as defined in NSF 2, free from exposed fasteners.

I. Cap exposed fastener threads, including those inside cabinets, with stainless-steel lock washers and stainless-steel cap (acorn) nuts.

J. Provide pipe slots on equipment with turned-up edges and sized to accommodate service and utility lines and mechanical connections.

K. Provide enclosures, including panels, housings, and skirts, to conceal service lines, operating components, and mechanical and electrical devices including those inside cabinets, unless otherwise indicated.

L. Seismic Restraints: Fabricate to comply with referenced SMACNA standard, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 STAINLESS-STEEL EQUIPMENT

A. Edges and Backsplashes: Provide equipment edges and backsplashes indicated complying with referenced SMACNA standard, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Apply sound dampening to underside of metal work surfaces, including sinks and similar units. Provide coating with smooth surface and hold coating 1 inch (25 mm) back from open edges for cleaning.

C. Tables: Fabricate with reinforced tops, legs, and reinforced undershelves or cross bracing to comply with referenced SMACNA standard, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. Tops: Minimum 0.0781-inch- (1.984-mm-) thick stainless steel, unless otherwise

indicated. 2. Legs: 1-5/8 inch (41.3 mm) OD, minimum 0.0625-inch- (1.588-mm-) thick

stainless steel with stainless-steel gusset and adjustable insert bullet-type feet with minimum adjustment of 1 inch (25 mm) up or down without exposing threads, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Undershelves: Minimum 0.625-inch- (1.588-mm-) thick stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Top and Undershelf Reinforcement: Provide minimum 0.0781-inch- (1.984-mm-) thick, stainless-steel reinforcing, unless otherwise indicated.

5. Cross Bracing: 1-1/4 inch (31.75 mm) OD, minimum 0.0625-inch- (1.588-mm-) thick stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Sinks: Fabricate of minimum 0.0781-inch- (1.984-mm-) thick stainless steel with fully welded, 1-piece construction. Construct 2 sides and bottom of sink compartment from 1 stainless-steel sheet with ends welded integral and without overlapping joints or open spaces between compartments. Provide double-wall partitions between compartments with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) radius rounded tops that are welded integral with sink body. Cove horizontal, vertical, and interior corners with 3/4-inch (19-mm) radius. Pitch and crease sinks to waste for drainage without pooling. Seat wastes in die-stamped depressions without solder, rivets, or welding. 1. Wastes: 2-inch (50-mm) nickel-plated bronze, rotary-handle waste assembly with

stainless-steel strainer plate and nickel-plated brass, connected overflow. 2. Drainboards: Minimum 0.0781-inch- (1.984-mm-) thick stainless steel, pitched to

sink at 1/8 inch/12 inches (3 mm/300 mm) of length. Reinforce drainboards with minimum 0.0781-inch- (1.984-mm-) thick stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Legs: 1-5/8 inch (41.3 mm) OD, minimum 0.0625-inch- (1.588-mm-) thick stainless steel with stainless-steel gusset welded to 0.1094-inch- (2.779-mm-) thick, stainless-steel support plate. Provide adjustable insert bullet-type feet with minimum adjustment of 1 inch (25 mm) up or down without exposing threads, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Drainboard Braces: 1 inch (25 mm) OD, minimum 0.0625-inch- (1.588-mm-) thick stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.

5. Cross Bracing: 1-1/4 inch (31.75 mm) OD, minimum 0.0625-inch- (1.588-mm-) thick stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Wall Shelves and Overshelves: Fabricate to comply with referenced SMACNA standard, unless otherwise indicated, and with minimum 0.0625-inch- (1.588-mm-) thick, stainless-steel shelf tops.

F. Drawers: Provide lift-out type, 1-piece, die-stamped drawer pan fabricated from 0.050-inch- (1.27-mm-) thick stainless steel with inside corners radiused. Support drawer pan with 0.0625-inch- (1.588-mm-) thick, stainless-steel channel frame welded to drawer front. Provide 1-inch- (25-mm) thick, double-wall front fabricated from 0.0625-inch- (1.588-mm-) thick stainless steel and with integral recessed pull. Fill void in drawer front with semirigid fiberglass sound dampening. Mount drawers on NSF-certified, full-extension, stainless-steel drawer slides that have minimum 100-lb (45-kg) load capacity per pair, ball-bearing rollers, and positive stop. Mount drawer slides for self-closing on drawer housing as indicated.

2.5 EXHAUST HOOD FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate hoods indicated from minimum 0.050-inch- (1.27-mm-) thick stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NFPA 96 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Refer to Division 15 Sections for duct, fan, damper, and fire-extinguishing system

requirements.

B. Grease Removal: Provide removable, stainless-steel, baffle-type grease filters with spring-loaded fastening. Provide minimum 0.0781-inch- (1.984-mm-) thick, stainless-steel filter frame and removable collection basins or troughs.

C. Light Fixtures: Provide NSF-certified fixtures with lamps, vapor-tight sealed lenses, and wiring in stainless-steel conduit on hood exterior.

D. Exhaust-Duct Collars: Minimum 0.0625-inch- (1.588-mm-) thick stainless steel.

2.6 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. 1. Remove or blend tool and die marks and stretch lines into finish. 2. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directional textured, polished finish

indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.

B. Concealed Surfaces: No. 2B finish (bright, cold-rolled, unpolished finish).

C. Exposed Surfaces: No. 4 finish (bright, directional polish).

D. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

E. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, service-utility connections, and other conditions affecting installation and performance of food service equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping, mechanical, and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install food service equipment level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, original design, and referenced standards.

B. Complete equipment field assembly, where required, using methods indicated. 1. Provide closed butt and contact joints that do not require a filler.

2. Grind field welds on stainless-steel equipment smooth, and polish to match adjacent finish. Comply with welding requirements in "Fabrication, General" Article.

C. Install equipment with access and maintenance clearances according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Provide cutouts in equipment, neatly formed, where required to run service lines through equipment to make final connections.

E. Except for mobile and adjustable-leg equipment, securely anchor and attach items and accessories to walls, floors, or bases with stainless-steel fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Install cabinets and similar equipment on concrete or masonry bases in a bed of sealant.

G. Install hoods to comply with NFPA 96 requirements.

H. Install seismic restraints according to referenced SMACNA standard.

I. Install trim strips and similar items requiring fasteners in a bed of sealant. Fasten with stainless-steel fasteners at 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. maximum.

J. Install sealant in joints between equipment and abutting surfaces with continuous joint backing, unless otherwise indicated. Provide airtight, watertight, vermin-proof, sanitary joints.

3.3 PROTECTING

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure food service equipment is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.

3.4 COMMISSIONING

A. Startup Services: Engage factory-authorized service representatives to perform startup services and to demonstrate and train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below. 1. Coordinate food service equipment startup with service-utility testing, balancing,

and adjustments. Do not operate steam lines before they have been cleaned and sanitized.

2. Remove protective coverings and clean and sanitize equipment, both inside and out, and relamp equipment with integral lighting. Where applicable, comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions.

3. Test each equipment item for proper operation. Repair or replace equipment that is defective in operation, including units that operate below required capacity or that operate with excessive noise or vibration.

4. Test refrigeration equipment's ability to maintain specified operating temperature under heavy-use conditions. Repair or replace equipment that does not maintain specified operating temperature.

5. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

6. Test motors and rotating equipment for proper rotation and lubricate moving parts according to manufacturer's written instructions.

7. Test water, drain, gas, steam, oil, refrigerant, and liquid-carrying components for leaks. Repair or replace leaking components.

8. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance for each food service equipment item.

9. Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."

10. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least 7 days' advance notice.

3.5 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. The plans and specifications will be bid with ‘NO’ substitutions in manufacturer or model number. Failure to provide equipment per specifications will result KEC in removing and replacing with the specified piece of equipment at the cost of the KEC.

B. See Specifications to follow:

ITEM #1 PREP TABLE

Quantity: One (1)

Manufacturer: Nationwide Fabrication

Model: PT

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:1. Model PT 8'-0" x 30" s/s prep table w/(2)18" x 24" x 12" deep tubs, lever drain brackets, marine

edge, left end splash, 20x20 s/s fully enclosed drawer, partial undershelf, open area for trashreceptable.

2. T&S Brass Model B-0231 Sink Mixing Faucet, 12" swing nozzle, wall mounted, 8" centers on sinkfaucet with 1/2" IPS eccentric flanged female inlets, lever handles

3. T&S Brass Model B-3950 Waste Valve, twist handle, 3-1/2" sink opening, 2" drain outlet with 1-1/2"adapter (replaces B-3912, B-3916)

ITEM #2 WALL SHELF

Quantity: Two (2)


Model: WS

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.1. Model WS 8'0" x 12" s/s wall shelf, 18 ga s/s min.

ITEM #3 DRY STORAGE SHELVING

Quantity: One (1)

Manufacturer: Metro

Model: DRYSTOR

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:1. Model DRYSTOR 1 Lot of (3) sections dry storage shelving consisting of:2. Model 2430BR Super Erecta® Shelf, wire, 30"W x 24"D, Bright (zinc) finish, plastic split sleeves

are included in each carton, NSF3. Model 2448BR Super Erecta® Shelf, wire, 48"W x 24"D, Bright (zinc) finish, plastic split sleeves

are included in each carton, NSF4. Model 2454BR Super Erecta® Shelf, wire, 54"W x 24"D, Bright (zinc) finish, plastic split sleeves

are included in each carton, NSF5. Model 74P Super Erecta® SiteSelect™ Post, 74-5/8"H, adjustable leveling bolt, posts are grooved

at 1" increments & numbered at 2" increments, double grooved every 8", chrome finish

ITEM #4 HAND SINK

Quantity: Two (2)

Manufacturer: Elkay Foodservice Products

Model: EHS-14X

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:1. Model EHS-14X Economy Hand Sink, wall mount, 14"W x 16"D x 11"H O.A., 18 gauge stainless

steel top & bowl, 10" wide x 12" front-to-back x 5" deep bowl, 6" backsplash, includes gooseneckfaucet, Z-clip mounting bracket & 1-1/2" basket strainer (Flyer Pricing)

2. Add one right hand side splash3. Delete Faucet4. T&S Brass Model B-1115-131X-WH4 Workboard/Bar Sink Faucet, wall mount, 4" centers, 3" swivel

gooseneck nozzle, 4" wrist handles, stream regulator tip, 1/2" NPT, ADA compliant (replaces

discontinued model B-1165)

ITEM #5 DRY STORAGE SHELVING

Quantity: One (1)

Manufacturer: Metro

Model: DRYSTOR

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:1. Model DRYSTOR 1 Lot of (3) sections dry storage shelving consisting of:2. Model 1860BR Super Erecta® Shelf, wire, 60"W x 18"D, Bright (zinc) finish, plastic split sleeves

are included in each carton, NSF3. Model 74P Super Erecta® SiteSelect™ Post, 74-5/8"H, adjustable leveling bolt, posts are grooved

at 1" increments & numbered at 2" increments, double grooved every 8", chrome finish

ITEM #6 WALK-IN COOLER/FREEZER

Quantity: One (1)

Manufacturer: American Panel Corporation

Model: WI C/F

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.1. Model WI C/F Walk-in cooler/freezer w/embossed aluminum finishes inside, white ceiling, s/s

exterior where exposed, 36" high kickplates in & out on doors and jambs, (2)34" doors w/visionwindows, 4" floor in freezer w/interior ramp, vinyl screds in cooler, extra vapor proof LED lights(installed by e.c.),remote pre-assembled condensing units w/premium covers. SIZE PER PLAN

ITEM #7 COOLER EVAPORATOR, INCLUDED W/ITEM #6

Quantity: One (1)


Model: CLR EVAP

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.1. Model CLR EVAP Cooler evaporator, included w/item #6

ITEM #8 FREEZER EVAPORATOR, INCLUDED W/ITEM #6

Quantity: One (1)


Model: FRZEVAP

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.1. Model FRZEVAP Freezer evaporator, included w/item #6

ITEM #9 SPARE NO.

ITEM #10 DUNNAGE RACK

Quantity: Two (2)

Manufacturer: SPG International

Model: 4H2126

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.1. Model 4H2126 Kelmax Dunnage Rack, heavy duty, 1-1/2" x 1-3/4" tubular, one tier, 36"W x 24"D x

8"H, all aluminum, 3000 lb. capacity, NSF

ITEM #11 FREEZER REFRIGERATION SYSTEM INCLUDED W/ITEM #6

Quantity: One (1)


Model: FRZ COMP

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.1. Model FRZ COMP Freezer refrigeration system included w/item #6

ITEM #12 COOLER REFRIGERATION SYSTEM INCLUDED W/ITEM #6

Quantity: One (1)


Model: CLR COMP

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.1. Model CLR COMP Cooler refrigeration system included w/item #6

ITEM #13 COOLER/FREEZER SHELVING

Quantity: One (1)

Manufacturer: Metro

Model: CLRFRZSHELV

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:1. Model CLRFRZSHELV 1 Lot of (8) sections cooler/freeezer shelving consisting of:2. Model MQ2436G MetroMax Q™ Shelf, 36"W x 24"D, open grid polymer with Microban®

antimicrobial product protection, epoxy coat steel frame, (4) wedge connectors, NSF3. Model MQ74PE MetroMax Q™ Post, 74"H, for stationary use, epoxy coated steel with built in

Microban® antimicrobial product protection

ITEM #14 WALL CABINET

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.1. Supplied by GC

ITEM #15 DESK

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.

1. Supplied by G.C.

ITEM #16 1 LOT OF (1) SECTIONS CHEMICAL STORAGE SHELVING CONSISTING OF:

Quantity: One (1)

Manufacturer: Metro

Model: CHEM

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:1. Model CHEM 1 Lot of (1) sections chemical storage shelving consisting of:2. Model 1836NK3 Super Erecta® Shelf, wire, 36"W x 18"D, plastic split sleeves are included in each

carton, Metroseal 3™ epoxy-coated corrosion-resistant finish with Microban® antimicrobialprotection, NSF

3. Model 74PK3 Super Erecta® SiteSelect™ Post, 74-5/8"H, adjustable leveling bolt, posts aregrooved at 1" increments & numbered at 2" increments, double grooved every 8", Metroseal 3™epoxy-coated corrosion-resistant finish with Microban® antimicrobial protection

ITEM #17 MOP SINK & BIBB FAUCET

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.1. Supplied by Plumbing Contractor

ITEM #18 SHELVING, WALL-MOUNTED

Quantity: One (1)

Manufacturer: Advance Tabco

Model: K-245

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.1. Model K-245 Utility Shelf, 24"W x 8"D

ITEM #19 SPARE NO.

ITEM #20 DRYER

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.1. Supplied by Owner

ITEM #21 WASHING MACHINE

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.1. Supplied by Owner

ITEM #22 WALL SHELF/ POT RACK

Quantity: One (1)


Model: WS/PR

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.1. Model WS/PR 8'6" x 12" s/s wall shelf w/pot rack welded to the brackets, (12) double hooks, 18 ga

min.

ITEM #23 3 COMPARTMENT SINK/CLEAN DISHTABLE

Quantity: One (1)


Model: 3CS

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:1. Model 3CS 10'0" x 30" s/s clean dishtable/3 compartment sink w/(3)18" wide x 14" deep tubs,

welded together w/no mulliion divider, continual splash and bowl construction, overflow hole, 'H'bracket for racks, s/s undershelves left and right, lever drain brackets & end splash

2. T&S Brass Model B-0231 Sink Mixing Faucet, 12" swing nozzle, wall mounted, 8" centers on sinkfaucet with 1/2" IPS eccentric flanged female inlets, lever handles

3. T&S Brass Model B-3950-01 Waste Valve, twist handle, 3-1/2" sink opening, 2" drain outlet with 1-1/2" adapter and overflow assembly (replaces B-3916-01)

ITEM #24 DISHWASHER, DOOR TYPE, VENTLESS

Quantity: One (1)

Manufacturer: Hobart

Model: AM15VLT-2

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:1. Model AM15VLT-2 Ventless Door Type Dishwasher, Energy Recovery, tall chamber, hot water

sanitize, internal condensing system, 40 racks/hr, straight-thru or corner, solid-state controls withdigital status, booster heater, electric tank heat, auto-fill, stainless steel tank, doors & feet, 208-240/60/3, ENERGY STAR®

2. Standard warranty - 1-Year parts, labor & travel time during normal working hours within the USA3. Model DWT-AM15 Drain water tempering kit4. On-site DWT installation by local Hobart Service Office (this price is available only if the local Hobart

Service Office completes the installation of the dishwasher within a 50 mile radius and during normalbusiness hours). Price is available only with machine purchase (if purchased separately localinstallation rates will apply)

5. Model PRESREG-3/40BR 3/4" brass pressure regulator6. Model SPEC-KIT Single point electrical connect AM15 kit (field installation required) (3 phase

booster machines only)7. Additional Racks supplied by Owner

ITEM #25 1 LOT OF (1) SECTIONS POT/PAN STORAGE SHELVING CONSISTING OF:

Quantity: One (1)

Manufacturer: Metro

Model: POT/PAN

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:1. Model POT/PAN 1 Lot of (1) sections pot/pan storage shelving consisting of:

2. Model MQ2436G MetroMax Q™ Shelf, 36"W x 24"D, open grid polymer with Microban®antimicrobial product protection, epoxy coat steel frame, (4) wedge connectors, NSF

3. Model MQ74PE MetroMax Q™ Post, 74"H, for stationary use, epoxy coated steel with built inMicroban® antimicrobial product protection

ITEM #26 DISPOSER

Quantity: One (1)

Manufacturer: InSinkErator

Model: SS-200-18C-CC101

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:1. Model SS-200-18C-CC101 SS-200™ Complete Disposer Package, with 18" diameter bowl, 6-5/8"

diameter inlet, with removable splash baffle, 2 HP motor, stainless steel construction, includessyphon breaker, solenoid valve, flow control valve, programmable CC-101 control center, autoreversing, timed run, post flush, adjustable leg kit

2. (1) year parts & labor warranty from date of installation (standard)3. Standard height disposer body4. 208v/60/3-ph, 3.3 amps5. Model SYPHON STD Syphon breaker standard, 1/2" (11477)

ITEM #26.1 PRE-RINSE FAUCET ASSEMBLY

Quantity: One (1)

Manufacturer: T&S Brass

Model: B-0133-B

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.1. Model B-0133-B EasyInstall Pre-Rinse Unit, wall mount. base faucet with spring check cart. & lever

handles, 2" diameter flanges with 1/2" NPT female eccentric flanged inlets, 35-1/2"H, 15" overhang,8-1/4" clearance, 18" riser, B-0107 spray valve, B-0044-H flex stainless steel hose, 6" wall bracket

ITEM #27 SOILED DISHTABLE

Quantity: One (1)


Model: SDT

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.1. Model SDT 'L' Shaped soiled dishtbale w/welded in disposer cone, scrap trough, disposer switch

bracket, s/s underhself, end splash, tray drop extension through, splash notches to accommodateroll down door tracks.

ITEM #28 ICE CUBER

Quantity: One (1)

Manufacturer: Manitowoc

Model: IY-0324A

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:1. Model IY-0324A Indigo™ Series Ice Maker, cube-style, air-cooled, self-contained condenser, 22"W x

24-1/2"D x 21-1/2"H, up to 350-lb approximately/24 hours, DuraTech™ exterior (stainless finish with

innovative clear-coat resists fingerprints & dirt), half-dice size cubes2. 3 year parts & labor Commercial warranty3. 5 year parts & labor Commercial warranty on evaporator4. 5- year parts & 3- year labor Commercial warranty on compressor5. (-161) 115v/60/1ph, 11.5 amps6. Model AR-10000 Arctic Pure® Primary Water Filter Assembly, includes head, shroud, hardware,

mounting assembly, & (1) filter cartridge, 14,000 gallon capacity, 0-600 lbs./ice per day7. Model B-320 Ice Bin, 22"W x 34"D, x 38"H, with top-hinged front-opening door, approximately 210 lb

ice storage capacity, for top-mounted ice maker, stainless steel exterior8. 6" adjustable stainless steel legs, standard

ITEM #29 SPARE NO.

ITEM #30 SPARE NO.

ITEM #31 PAN RACK, BUN

Quantity: One (1)

Manufacturer: New Age

Model: 1461

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:1. Model 1461 Bun Pan Rack, mobile, full height, open sides, accommodates (38) 18" x 26" pans,

slides on 1-1/2" centers, all welded aluminum construction, end loading, (4) 5" platform swivelcasters, NSF

2. Lifetime warranty against rust & corrosion, 5 year construction warranty, standard3. 5" platform type casters, std.

ITEM #32 HEATED CABINET, MOBILE

Quantity: One (1)

Manufacturer: Cres Cor

Model: H-137-SUA-12D

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:1. Model H-137-SUA-12D Cabinet, Mobile Heated, insulated, top-mount heater assembly, recessed

push/pull handles, magnetic latch, (12) sets chrome plated wire universal angle slides for 12" x 20"thru 18" x 26" pans on 4-1/2" centers, adjustable 1-1/2" centers, reversible dutch doors, (4) heavyduty 5" swivel casters (2) braked, anti-microbial latches, stainless steel construction, NSF,ENERGY STAR®

2. Standard Warranty: 1 yr labor with 3 yr parts warranty3. 120v/60/1-ph, 1500 w, 12.0 amp, 10 ft power cord, NEMA 5-15P, standard4. Right-hand door swing, standard5. Model 1056-002 Corner Bumpers, add 2" to O.A. dimensions, non-marking, gray

ITEM #33 SPARE NO.

ITEM #34 EXHAUST HOOD

Quantity: One (1)

Manufacturer: Captive-Aire

Model: EXHHOOD

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:1. Model EXHHOOD 8ft 6" Long Exhaust-Only Wall Canopy Hood with Built-in 3" Back Standoff

- 430 SS Where Exposed - Fire Cabinet on the Right Side (Additional charges may apply for cabinet if not sold with firesystem) - FILTER - 20" tall x 16" wide Stainless Steel Captrate Solo filter with hook, ETL Listed. Particulatecapture efficiency: 93% efficient at 9 microns, 72% efficient at 5 microns - L55 Series E26 Canopy Light Fixture - High Temp Assembly, Includes Clear Thermal and ShockResistant Globe (L55 Fixture) - Extra Fixtures- L55 Series E26 Canopy Light Fixture - High Temp Assembly, Includes ClearThermal and Shock Resistant Globe (L55 Fixture) - Screw In Halogen Bulb, L55 Series E26 Canopy Light Fixture - High Temp Assembly, IncludesClear Thermal and Shock Resistant Globe - EXHAUST RISER - Factory installed 10" X 16" - 1/2 Pint Grease Cup New Style, Flanged Slotted - FIELD WRAPPER 24.00" High Front, Left, Right - LEFT END STANDOFF (FINISHED) 1" Wide 54" Long Insulated - RIGHT QUARTER END PANEL 23" Top Width, 0" Bottom Width, 23" High 430 SS - Electrical Package Installation in Utility Cabinet by Plant.

2. Model SC-010110FP Starter Coil Control Only w/ control for 1 Exhaust Fan, Exhaust on in Fire,Lights out in Fire, Fan(s) On/Off Thermostatically Controlled. Room temperature sensor shippedloose for field installation. Includes 1 Duct Thermostat kit. - Digital Prewire Lighting Relay Kit. Includes hood lighting relay & terminal blocks. Allows for up to1400W of lighting each.

3. Model FS Service Design Verification for Exhaust Fan Service Design Verification for Hood Service Design Verification for Standard Electrical Control Package Service Design Verification Mileage Charge: (52) x 2 = 104 total miles

4. Model ANSUL ANSUL-3.0 Ansul 3 gallon Fire System in Utility Cabinet (includes pre-piped hood(s)with detection, tank(s), release mechanism, microswitches and pull station).

Includes piping for hood: 1. - MGVA2 GAS VALVE - 2" Mechanical Shutoff Valve (Ansul)(28-55610) - Includes UpstreamStrainer assembly

5. Exhaust Fan, ductwork, roof curb & installation of complete system supplied by MC

ITEM #35 CONVECTION OVEN

Quantity: One (1)

Manufacturer: Blodgett Oven

Model: DFG-100 DBL

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:1. Model DFG-100 DBL Convection Oven, gas, double-deck, standard depth, capacity (5) 18" x 26"

pans per compartment, (SSD) solid state digital controls, 2-speed fans, , interior light, simultaneousoperated doors with glass, porcelain crumb tray, stainless steel front, sides & top, 6" stainless steellegs, flue connector, (2) 1/2 HP, 55,000 BTU each, cETL, NSF, CE

2. (3) year parts, (2) year labor warranty and (2) additional year door warranty (parts only), standard3. Natural gas4. 115v/60/1-ph, 6.0 amps, 3-wire with ground, 6' cord, NEMA 5-15P, 1/2 hp (per deck), standard5. Model SSD Top Oven: Solid State digital with Pulse Plus and Cook & Hold, standard6. Top Oven: Controls on right side of oven, standard

7. Model SSD Bottom Oven: Solid State digital with Pulse Plus and Cook & Hold, standard8. Bottom Oven: Controls on right side of oven, standard9. Draft diverter10. 4" low profile casters (set)11. NOTE: DO NOT deduct cost of standard legs12. Gas manifold

ITEM #35.1 SAFETY SYSTEM MOVEABLE GAS CONNECTOR

Quantity: One (1)

Manufacturer: Dormont Manufacturing

Model: 1675KIT2S48

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.1. Model 1675KIT2S48 Dormont Blue Hose™ Moveable Gas Connector Kit, 3/4" inside dia., 48" long,

covered with stainless steel braid, coated with blue antimicrobial PVC, 1 SnapFast® QD, 2 SwivelMAX®, 1 full port valve, coiled restraining cable with hardware, 160,000 BTU/hr minimum flowcapacity, limited lifetime warranty

ITEM #36 CONVECTION STEAMER

Quantity: One (1)

Manufacturer: Cleveland Range

Model: 24CGA10.2

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:1. Model 24CGA10.2 Steamcraft® Gemini™ 10 Convection Steamer, pressureless, gas, 2

compartments with individual generators, (5) 12 x 20 x 2-1/2 pans/compartment capacity, electro-mechanical 60 minute timers, 1 standard treated & tap water connection, stainless steelconstruction, 6" adjustable legs with flanged feet, 144,000 BTU total

2. 1-year limited warranty, standard3. Natural Gas (specify altitude if over 2000 feet)4. (VOS115) 115v/60/1-ph, 2.0 amp, 2-wire (DO NOT connect to GFI outlet)

ITEM #36.1 WATER FILTER ASSEMBLY

Quantity: One (1)

Manufacturer: Everpure

Model: EV979750

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.1. Model EV979750 KleenSteam® CT System, total system for boilerless steamers, 1.0 gpm flow

rate, deliming, 4CB5 carbon filter, SS-10 scale inhibitor Cartridge, dip tube (2) 7 oz. bagsScaleKleen, pressure gauge, water shut-off valve & wall bracket

ITEM #37 HD RANGE, 18", ADD-A-UNIT, 2 HOT PLATES

Quantity: One (1)

Manufacturer: Market Forge

Model: 2-HPGR

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:

1. Model 2-HPGR Restaurant Range, gas, 18", Add-A-Unit, (2) hot plates, cabinet base, pilot safetyshut-off valve, hinged door, magnetic latch, removable drip pan, bottom shelf, stainless steelconstruction, 6" adjustable bullet feet, 60,000 BTU, CSA, NSF

2. Standard (1) one year parts & labor warranty, equipment only3. Natural gas4. Model 93-5476 Casters (set of 4; 2 with brakes)

ITEM #37.1 SAFETY SYSTEM MOVEABLE GAS CONNECTOR

Quantity: One (1)

Manufacturer: Dormont Manufacturing

Model: 1675KIT2S48

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.1. Model 1675KIT2S48 Dormont Blue Hose™ Moveable Gas Connector Kit, 3/4" inside dia., 48" long,

covered with stainless steel braid, coated with blue antimicrobial PVC, 1 SnapFast® QD, 2 SwivelMAX®, 1 full port valve, coiled restraining cable with hardware, 160,000 BTU/hr minimum flowcapacity, limited lifetime warranty

ITEM #38 WALL FLASHING

Quantity: One (1)

Manufacturer: Custom

Model: WF

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.1. Model WF S/S wall flashing below the exhaust hood on the back and left wall from floor to bottom of

hood. If local code requires to extend behind the hood or past KEC must include.

ITEM #39 SPARE NO.

ITEM #40 SPARE NO.

ITEM #41 PREP TABLE

Quantity: One (1)


Model: PT

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.1. Model PT 8'-0" x 30" s/s worktable w/ 20x20 s/s fully enclosed drawer, s/s undershelf

ITEM #42 WALL SHELF

Quantity: Two (2)


Model: WS

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.1. Model WS 8'0" & 6'6" x 12" s/s wall shelves, 18 ga s/s min.

ITEM #43 SPARE NO.

ITEM #44 SPARE NO.

ITEM #45 MILK COOLER

Quantity: One (1)

Manufacturer: Continental Refrigerator

Model: MC4-S

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:1. Model MC4-S Designer Line Milk Cooler, 49" long, single access, forced air cooling, (12) 13" x 13"

x 11" or (8) 19" x 13" x 11" crate capacity, stainless steel top, lid & door, white finished steelexterior body, galvanized interior with reinforced stainless steel floor, (4) locking swivel casters, 1/3hp

2. Standard warranty (for the United States & Canada Only): 3 year parts and labor; 5 yearcompressor

3. 115v/60/1, 10' cord, NEMA 5-15P, standard4. Model 5-223 Corner bumpers

ITEM #46 TARY SLIDE

Quantity: One (1)


Model: TS

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.1. Model TS 14'9" x 12" s/s tray slide w/raised ribs, support channel to rest on low wall, serving

counter #47 to lip over the turn up. KEC is responsible for coordination and trimming below the trayslide.

ITEM #47 SERVING COUNTER

Quantity: One (1)


Model: SERVCNTR

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.1. Model SERVCNTR 14'9" long s/s serving counter cabinet base design w/cut-outs for for two drop-in

hot food wells, drain line extension brackets, support bracing for sneeze guards provided by KEC,open storage w/intermediate shelves at both ends, lip counter over the tray slide #46

ITEM #47.1 PANTRY FAUCET

Quantity: One (1)

Manufacturer: T&S Brass

Model: B-0208-CR-HW

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications.1. Model B-0208-CR-HW Temp Deck Mount Faucet, single with ceramas cartridge, red (HW) index &

6" cast spout

ITEM #48 DROP-IN HOT WELL

Quantity: Two (2)

Manufacturer: Wells

Model: MOD-400TDM

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:1. Model MOD-400TDM Food Warmer, top-mount, built-in, electric, (4) 12" x 20" openings with

manifolded drains with one valve, wet/dry operation, thermostatic controls, stainless steel interior,insulated aluminum steel housing, cULus

2. Limited 2 year parts & 1 year labor warranty, standard3. Model 21893 208-240v/60/3-ph, 4.96-6.6kW, 14.5-17.8 amps, direct (field convertible to single

phase)

ITEM #49 SPARE NO.

ITEM #50 SPARE NO.

ITEM #51 SNEEZE GUARD, STATIONARY

Quantity: Two (2)

Manufacturer: English Manufacturing

Model: M-112A-3

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:1. Model M-112A-3 Sneezeguard, Pass-Over, 61-120" long, 18" high posts 1" OD with brushed

stainless steel finish (2) end posts (1) center post (4) 3/8" clear tempered glass panels withpolished edges

2. 3/8" glass, standard3. Model ENG-S/S Stainless steel, standard4. Model ENG-#4 Brushed #4, standard5. Model ENG-1"RND 1" round post, standard6. Model ENDPNL-112A End panel for M-112A-1/4" tempered glass, mounted to outside of post

ITEM #52 COLD PAN SERVING COUNTER

Quantity: One (1)

Manufacturer: Cambro

Model: VBR6186

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:1. Model VBR6186 Versa Food Bars Serving Buffet, cold food, 6 ft. unit, 82" OAL x 42-1/2"W x 62-

3/4"H, holds (5) full size food pans, accommodates various size food pans up to 6", cooled withoptional Camchillers® or Cold Fest®, double-wall polyethylene, molded-in handles, threaded faucetdrain, non-electrical, (4) 6" swivel casters with brakes, navy blue (made to order), NSF

2. Model VBRR6614 Versa Food Bar Tray Rail Only, 72", sandstone, NSF3. VERIFY COLOR WITH OWNER

ITEM #53 CASH REGISTER STAND

Quantity: One (1)

Manufacturer: Cambro

Model: VCSWR186

Furnish and set in place per manufacturer's standard specifications and the following:1. Model VCSWR186 Versa Cash Register Cart, 52-3/4"L x 32-1/4"W x 43"H, lockable center drawer,

adjustable shelf and rails, cut out design, will not dent, crack or rust, one-piece, seamless, double-wall polyethylene, polyurethane foam insulation, molded-in handles, threaded faucet drain, non-electrical, (4) 6" swivel casters with brakes, navy blue (made to order), NSF

2. VERIFY COLOR WITH OWNER

CSanders

Typewritten Text

END OF SECTION 11400


11 6623 – GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT

Page 1 of 3

SECTION 11 6623

GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Wall mounted protection pads.


A. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2008.

B. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006.

C. NFPA 286 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contribution of Wall and Ceiling Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth; 2006.

D. NFPA 701 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films; 2004.


A. Large Components: Ensure that large components can be moved into final position without damage to other construction.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data showing configuration, sizes, materials, finishes, hardware, and accessories; include:

1. Fire rating certifications.

2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings: For custom fabricated equipment indicate, in large scale detail, construction methods; method of attachment or installation; type and gage of metal, hardware, and fittings; plan front elevation; elevations and dimensions; minimum one cross section; utility requirements as to types, sizes, and locations.

D. Erection Drawings: Detailed dimensional requirements for proper location of equipment.

E. Samples: Submit samples of wall pad coverings in manufacturer's available range of colors.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with not less than three years of documented experience.

B. System Standard: Specifications and Drawings are based on equipment types by the specified system standard manufacturer. Equipment types manufactured by other acceptable manufacturers are permitted, subject to compliance with specified requirements, and provided that deviations in dimensions, configurations, and profile are minor, and do not detract substantially from the indicated design intent.

1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 4000 and Section 01 6000.


A. Deliver products to project site in manufacturer's original packaging with factory original labels attached.


Page 2 of 3

B. Store products indoors and elevated above floor; prevent warping, twisting, or sagging.

C. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; protect from extremes of weather, temperature, moisture, and other damage.

1.07 WARRANTY


B. Correct defective Work within a two years period after Date of Final Completion. Replace parts that fail under normal use at no extra charge to Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. System Standard Manufacturer:

1. Porter Athletic Equipment Company: www.porter-ath.com.

a. Equipment types and model numbers specified in this Section.

2. AALCO Athletic Equipment: www. aalcomfg.com.

3. Jaypro Sports, LLC: www.jaypro.com.


2.02 GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. See Drawings for sizes and locations.

B. Where mounting dimensions or sizes are not indicated, comply with applicable requirements of the following:

1. National Federation of State High School Associations (NFHS) sports rules.

C. Provide mounting plates, brackets, and anchors of sufficient size and strength to securely attach equipment to building structure; comply with requirements of contract documents.

D. Hardware: Heavy duty steel hardware, as recommended by manufacturer.

2.03 WALL AND COLUMN PADDING

A. Wall Padding: Foam filling bonded to backing board, wrapped in covering; each panel fabricated in one piece.

1. Product: Porter Model No. 00562-0XX, standard, with nailing margins.

2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of 25 or less, smoke developed of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 or NFPA 255 as a complete panel.

3. Flammability: Comply with NFPA 286.

4. Covering: Vinyl-coated polyester fabric, mildew and rot resistant; stapled to back of board.

a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard range.

b. Texture: Embossed leather-look.

c. Fabric Weight: 14 oz./sq. yd.

5. Foam: Urethane, firm, minimum 6 pcf nominal density.

6. Foam: Open cell polychloroprene (Neoprene), minimum 5.5 pcf nominal density.

7. Foam Thickness: 3 inches.

8. Backing Board: Plywood.


Page 3 of 3

a. Thickness: 3/8 inch.

b. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of 25 or less, smoke developed of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 or NFPA 255.

9. Panel Dimensions: 24 inches wide by 72 inches long, including nailing margins. Located in Gymnasiums.

11. Nailing Margins: 1 inch wide, covered by fabric covering.

12. Mounting: Removable; Z-clips fixed to wall and to padding.

13. Electrical Outlet Inserts: Model No. 00341/00342 sized for outlets as required; gray color.

B. Specially Shaped Padding: Same construction as standard padding; provide modular panels to fit irregularly shaped members, areas, and protrusions in gymnasium as indicated; provide padding for:

1. Columns.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Take field measurements to ensure proper fitting of work. If taking field measurements before fabrication will delay work, allow for adjustments within recommended tolerances.

B. Inspect areas and conditions before installation. Notify Architect in writing of unsatisfactory or detrimental conditions. Do not proceed until conditions have been corrected. Commencing installation constitutes acceptance of work site conditions.

C. Verify that electrical services are correctly located and of the proper characteristics.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with contract documents and manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install equipment rigid, straight, plumb, and level.

C. Secure all equipment with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.

D. Install wall padding securely, with edges tight to wall and without wrinkles in fabric covering.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Verify proper placement of equipment.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Remove masking or protective covering from finished surfaces.

B. Clean equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until Final Completion.

B. Replace damaged products before Final Completion.

END OF SECTION



Page 1 of 3

SECTION 12 4920

ROLLER SHADES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. SUPPLIER: Furnish and install Manual Roller Shades (Premium Quality)

B. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:

1. Section 06100: Rough Carpentry

1.02 REFERENCES

A. FLAME-RESISTANT MATERIALS SHALL PASS OR EXCEED ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING TESTS:

National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 701 (small scale for horizontal applications)

Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 302 Flammability of Interior Materials

California Administrative Code Title 19

Federal Standard 191 Method 5903 (used by Port Authority of New York and New Jersey for drapery, curtain, and upholstery material)

Boston Fire Department Teat BFD IX-1

New York State Uniform Fire Prevention and Building Code

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. PRODUCT DATA: Manufacturer’s descriptive literature shall be submitted indicating materials, finishes, construction and installation instructions and verifying that product meets requirements specified. Manufacturers recommendations for maintenance and cleaning shall be included.

B. DRAWINGS AND DIAGRAMS: Wiring diagrams of any motorized components or units, working and assembly drawings shall be supplied as requested.

C. SAMPLE: Responsible contracting officer or agent shall supply one sample shade of each type specified in this contract for approval. Supplied units shall be furnished complete with all required components, mounting and associated hardware, instructions and warranty.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Supplier: Manufacturer, subsidiary or licensed agent shall be approved to supply the products specified, and to honor any claims against product presented in accordance with warranty.

B. INSTALLER: Installer or agent shall be qualified to install specified products by prior experience, demonstrated performance and acceptance of requirements of manufacturer, subsidiary, or licensed agent. Installer shall be responsible for an acceptable installation.

C. UNIFORMITY: Provide Manual Roller Shades of only one manufacturer for entire project.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Product shall be delivered to site in manufacturer’s original packaging.

B. Product shall be handled and stored to prevent damage to materials, finishes and operating mechanisms.


Page 2 of 3

1.06 JOB CONDITIONS:

A. Prior to shade installation, building shall be enclosed.

B. Interior temperature shall be maintained between 60° F. and 90° F. during and after installation; relative humidity shall not exceed 80%. Wet work shall be complete and dry.

1.07 WARRANTY:

A. Lifetime Limited Warranty. Fabrics warranted for 5 years. Specific product warranties available from manufacturer or its authorized agent.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER

A. Hunter Douglas Contract/ 13915 Danielson St., Ste.100/ Poway, CA 92064/ Phone: 800-727-8953 Fax: 800-205-9819/ Website: www.hunterdouglascontract.com, or architect approved equivalent. Contact the following for project assistance and dealer referral @ 800-964-2580: (Mideast/Midwest) Keith Burgess ext. #827311, (Southern/Central) Christopher Hagen ext. #827312, (Western/Mountain/Upper Midwest) David Cover ext. #827313, (Northeast) Patrick LeClair ext. #827314, (Southwest) Matthew Craven ext. 827317, (Southern Atlantic) Carol Addison ext. #827320

B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 MANUAL ROLLER SHADES

A. PRODUCT: Hunter Douglas “Manual Roller Shades”

B. MATERIALS:

1. FABRICS: Inherently anti-static, flame retardant, fade and stain resistant, light filtering, providing 10% openness factors.

2. CONTROL SYSTEM: Adjustment-free continuous qualified #10 stainless steel ball chain ((90-lb. test)) and pulley clutch operating system allows precise control and ensures a uniform look. Clutch will develop no more than ½ pound drag for ease of lifting. Glass reinforced polyester thermopolymer (PBT) plastic components conform to military specification MIL M-24519 and designed for smooth, trouble-free operation.

3. ROLLER: Circular-shaped painted extruded aluminum tubes with thicker wall & ribs provide additional strength while locking into place the clutch & end plug. 3” outside diameter extruded tube to have a .090 wall thickness. 2” outside diameter extruded tube to have a .072” wall thickness (1 ½” & 1 1/8” tubes have .055” wall thickness) providing strength & durability.

4. END PLUG: Heat stabilized fiber reinforced plastic outside sleeve and center shaft provide bearing surfaces on which the roller rides ensuring smooth, wear resistant operation.

5. BOTTOM ROD: Extruded aluminum weight in a Sealed Pocket Hem Bar, or Flat Bottom Bar for fabrics that are not seamable. Bottom rod is for tracking adjustments and provides uniform look.

6. MOUNTING HARDWARE: Manufacturer’s standard .07” nickel-plated, C1008/1010 cold rolled steel universal brackets including end plug bracket with lock down retainer device.

7. ADDITIONAL OPTIONS: Reverse Roll.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Shade measurements shall be accurate to within + 1/8” or as recommended in writing by manufacturer.


Page 3 of 3

2.04 FABRICS

A. FABRIC: Vienne (10% Openness)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION:

A. SUBCONTRACTOR shall be responsible for inspection on site, approval of mounting surfaces, installation conditions and field measurement for this work.

B. OTHER INTERACTING TRADES shall receive drawings of shade systems, dimensions, assembly and installation methods from subcontractor upon request.

3.02 INSTALLATION:

A. INSTALLATION shall comply with manufacturer’s specifications, standards and procedures as detailed on contract drawings.

B. ADEQUATE CLEARANCE shall be provided to permit unencumbered operation of shade and hardware.

C. CLEAN finish installation of dirt and finger marks. Leave work area clean and free of debris.

3.03 DEMONSTRATION:

A. Demonstrate operation method and instruct owner’s personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the blinds.

3.04 SCHEDULE:

A. Conference 125

B. Conference 129

C. Conference 217

D. Conference 252 – Entry door sidelight.

END OF SECTION

STEM School and Academy Barrons Building – Phase 3 · STEM School and Academy Barrons Building...

Documents

Transcript of STEM School and Academy Barrons Building – Phase 3 · STEM School and Academy Barrons Building...